Home

The Handbook of Wykeham Farrance GeoTriax

1. ose 9 0 002 0 0vc qui TL 9 z g 5 585 5 i ass Eze 3 ccc al oc 092 O OrvL Figure 1 5 Wykeham Farrance 50kN triaxial frame side and top view 505 0 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax WF10056 SN 100175 7 triaxial frame strain rate upwards direction GeoLab GIO 29 August 2005 PCI 6024E 120 5 98996 4 95782 y 3 96381x 2 96575x 1 00000 1 00000 0 99999 0 99999 y 0 99178 p ai 0 25000 7 1 00000 2 y 0 24695x ___ 50000 1 98305 7 0 99999 2 7 1 mm min 1 00000 pagseax 0 99999 2 00000mm min t i i 3 00000mm min 7 E d 4 00000mm min a M d 8 00000mm min E ol er 5 99999mm min P is 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 Time min Figure 1
2. npoiovta pag NEOTEK 8 EA BeviZ Aou 105 Xuupvn 171 23 B dii tof a i Eykaraotaon H EA GE 8a we aopean i lexus 30 Koamgeg ev yivet 1 Ocnopayyedies 2 Ta edn LEXA vd 10 1 3 TEG QuvoAo TOv ava povov 4 16n eyyunon 12 ano Thy trjv Eraipia avowrat Kat dev Pressure Gauges and Thermometers IL Box in galvanized steel Ring in chromium plated steel Transparent in glass kostil Pressure gauge element bimetallic spiral Shank centre back in galvanized steel Sheath in brass 1 2 G 3 8 G for TB 40 Box in chromium plated steel Transparent in kostil release Pressure gauge element bimetallic spiral Shank
3. instructions carefully and completely Make sure that you have application in panel board installations or other building in applications understood all the information ask colleagues Comply where a suitable mechanical enclosure shall be provided to fulfill with notes on the unit the requirements for shock hazard protection and or protection from hazardous energy levels as well for fire protection It Disconnect Before any installation maintenance or modification must only be installed and put into service by appropriately qual i system from work ified personnel supply Disconnect your system from the supply network Mounting network Ensure that it cannot be inadvertently re connected Mounting Admissible mounting positions see Fig 2 but observe der Before start Warning Improper installation operation may impair ating Keep free ventilation holes leave space for cooling of operation safety and result in operational difficulties or complete Perantara a especie distances see supplementary sheet Ensure failure Of the unit Attachment i Tilt the unit slightly rearward appropriate The unit must be installed and put into service by appro Snap on ii Fit th unit d ceri rail S installation priately qualified personnel Compliance with the rele support rail iii Slide it downward until it hits the stop vant regulations DIN VDE or specific national vgl Fig 2 iv Press against the bottom fro
4. 4 3 Figure 4 3 Programmable Gain Instrumentation Amplifier 4 10 Figure 4 4 Summary of Analog Input Connections 4 12 Figure 4 5 Differential Input Connections for Ground Referenced Signals 4 14 Figure 4 6 Differential Input Connections for Nonreferenced Signals 4 15 Figure 4 7 Single Ended Input Connections for Nonreferenced or Floating Signals recte entered 4 18 Figure 4 8 Single Ended Input Connections for Ground Referenced Signals 4 19 Figure 4 9 Analog Output 4 20 Figure 4 10 Digital I O Connections eese nennen 4 21 Figure 4 11 Digital I O Connections Block Diagram eee 4 22 Figure 4 12 Channel Configured for High DIO Power up State with External ti eet tee 4 24 Figure 4 13 Timing Specifications for Mode 1 Input 4 277 Figure 4 14 Timing Specifications for Mode 1 Output Transfer 4 28 Figure 4 15 Timing Specifications for Mode 2 Bidirectional Transfer 4 29 Figure 4 16 Timing Connections eene 4 31 Figure 4 17 Typical Posttriggered Acquisition 4 32 Figure 4 18 Typical Pretriggered 01 4 33 Figure 4 19 SCANCLK Signal
5. National Instruments Corporation 4 7 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Chapter 4 Signal Connections Table 4 3 1 0 Signal Summary Continued Signal Impedance Protection Sink Rise Type and Input Volts Source mA Time Signal Name Direction Output On Off mA at V at V ns Bias PFI4 GPCTR1_GATE DIO 0 5 3 5 at Voc 0 4 5at0 4 1 5 50 kO pu GPCTRI OUT DO 3 5 at 0 4 5 at 0 4 1 5 50 pu PFIS UPDATE DIO 0 5 3 5 at 0 4 5 at 0 4 1 5 50 pu PFI6 WFTRIG DIO 0 5 3 5 at 0 4 5 at 0 4 1 5 50 pu PFI7 STARTSCAN DIO 0 5 3 5 at 0 4 5 at 0 4 1 5 50 pu PFI8 GPCTRO_SOURCE DIO 0 5 3 5 at 0 4 5 at 0 4 1 5 50 pu PFI9 GPCTRO_GATE DIO 0 5 3 5 at 0 4 5 at 0 4 1 5 50 pu GPCTRO_OUT DO 3 5 at Voc 0 4 5at0 4 1 5 50 kO pu FREQ OUT DO 3 5 at 0 4 5 at 0 4 1 5 50 Analog Input Analog Output 100 DIO Digital Input Output DO Digital Output pu pullup Note The tolerance on the 50 kQ pullup and pulldown resistors is very large Actual value can range between 17 kQ and Analog Input Signal Overview Types of Signal Sources The analog input signals for these devices are lt 0 15 gt ASENSE and AIGND Connection of these ana
6. Signal Impedance Protection Sink Rise Type and Input Volts Source mA Time Signal Name Direction Output On Off mA at V at V ns Bias lt 0 15 gt 100 GQ 42 35 200 pA in parallel with 100 pF AISENSE 100 GQ 40 25 200 pA in parallel with 100 pF AIGND AO DACOOUT AO 010 Short circuit 5 at 10 5 at 10 10 6024E and 6025E only to ground V us DACIOUT AO 010 Short circuit 5 at 10 5 at 10 10 6024E and 6025E only to ground V us AOGND AO DGND DO DO 0 1 Q Short circuit 1A fused to ground DIO lt 0 7 gt DIO 0 5 13 at 0 4 24 at 1 1 50 pu 0 4 lt 0 7 gt DIO 0 5 2 5 at 3 7min 2 5 at 5 100 6025E only 0 4 pu lt 0 7 gt DIO 0 5 2 5 at 3 7min 2 5 at 5 100 kQ 6025E only 0 4 pu lt 0 7 gt DIO 0 5 2 5 at 3 7min 2 5 at 5 100 kQ 6025E only 0 4 pu SCANCLK DO 3 5 at 0 4 5 at 0 4 1 5 50 pu EXTSTROBE DO 3 5 at 0 4 5 at 0 4 1 5 50 pu PFIO TRIG1 DIO 0 5 3 5 at 0 4 5 at 0 4 1 5 50 PFI1 TRIG2 DIO 0 5 3 5 at 0 4 5 at 0 4 1 5 50 pu PFI2 CONVERT DIO 0 5 3 5 at 0 4 5 at 0 4 1 5 50 pu PFI3 GPCTR1_SOURCE DIO 0 5 3 5 at 0 4 5 at 0 4 1 5 50
7. 4 46 GPCTR1 GATE Signal rente dre teret 4 46 GPCTRI OUT Signal 4 47 UP DOWN 4 47 FREQ OUT Sigh l nidum get 4 49 Field Wiring Considerations esee rennen eere 4 49 Chapter 5 Calibration Loading Calibration 5 1 Selt Calibr tiofi e ele pb Eee 5 2 External Calibration ER et ep tet dee aaah eg Se perpe neta 5 2 Other Considerations epe e een d eee eee tes 5 3 Appendix A Specifications Appendix B Custom Cabling and Optional Connectors Appendix C Common Questions Appendix D Technical Support Resources Glossary Index National Instruments Corporation Vii 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Contents Figures Figure 1 1 The Relationship Between the Programming Environment NI DAQ and Your 1 5 Figure 3 1 6023 PCI 6024E PCI 6025E and PXI 6025E Block Diagram nere 3 1 Figure 3 2 DAQCard 6024E Block 3 2 Figure 3 3 cen cheer edens 3 5 Figure 3 4 CONVERT Signal Routing esee 3 8 Figure 3 5 PCI RTSI Bus Signal Connection eee 3 10 Figure 3 6 PXI RTSI Bus Signal Connection eee 3 11 Figure 4 1 I O Connector Pin Assignment for 6023 6024 4 2 Figure 4 2 I O Connector Pin Assignment for the 6025E
8. eyyunor Astroupywc 12 THY AvaAurikot Eyyunone 5 Arlee oven o E 5 000 r np vovrat neam E molli css NEOTEK SYETPHE 4 Xia Bevit dou 105 Xyupvn AOHNA 171 23 E Tn 210 9341533 amp 9359142 Fax 210 9359778 E10 01 1 Cet cA uoce uere i te le as So GREECE red FAX NO 0109359778 Jun 2883 18 19 P11 tak quen Ra amy metis uq ARN mem amp Merpnaswv TO 1969 1 Measuring amp Testing Systems since 1969 Yn owiv THA 2107721373 FT 4 8829 2632 FAX 210 7721302 30 louv 2008 HP DOAYTEXNEIOY 5 2 157 73 Load SOKN 5000kg 678 50 678 50 Load Button for load cell 154 10 154 10 Mounting adaptor for triaxial frame 92 00 ee 243 Tracker 240 Series Indicator 5 digit 10VDC T cer supply 609 50 Analogue output Status inputs RS422 485 communication
9. 0 1 Q maximum 607xE 6040E 10 V 0 to 10 V EXT REF 0 to EXT REF 6020E software selectable 6062E 10 V EXT REF software selectable 6024E 6025E 10V Current drive 5 mA maximum Protection Short circuit to ground Power On 0 V 200 mV Device Settling Time for Full Scale Step Slew Rate 607xE 3 to 0 5 LSB accuracy 20 V s 6062E 6040E 602xE 10 to 0 5 LSB accuracy 10 V us Device Reglitching Disabled Reglitching Enabled 607xE 604xE 20 mV 4 mV PCI 6024E 42 mV N A 6025E DAQCard 6024E 13 mV N A 6020E 100 mV N A 6062E 80 mV 30 mV Glitch Duration At Mid Scale Transition 607 1 5 ps 6040 6024 215 6025E 6020E 3 ps 6062 200 DC to 1 MHz Glitch energy magnitude at mid scale transition Stability Gain temperature coefficient except 6024E 6025E External reference 25 ppm C National Instruments Tel 800 433 3488 info ni com ni com 7 12 Bit E Series Multifunction Specifications Specifications NI 607xE NI 606xE NI 6040E NI 602xE continued Analog Output Output Characteristics Number of Channels 607xE 2 voltage outputs 6062 6040 6020 6024 6025 6023 None R solution eet deerit 12 bits 1 in 4 096 Maximum update rate Waveform Generation External Reference Input
10. Appendix 111 Appendix iv TRITECH DISPLAY MODULE c 20000 Q OOOOOOO UIE 4071 0000 lt OOOOOOOO E O JP1 0000000 O 5 O 0000000 OOOOOCO TRITECH SOKN TAL LER gece Tritech 50 Triaxial Load The Tritech 50 is designed to be used as part of a computer controlled triaxial system or as a stand alone unit The RS232 interface enables it to be used with any computer A Total RS232 Control interface gt Digital control gt Speed range 0 00001 to 9 99999mm per minute Soluti Wr Wy Farrance i ona TRITECH BUKN DIGITAL E farrante Combined with a logger the system can control the direction of travel speed rapid approach and unloading The use of transducers will give electronic data acquisition and feedback to ensure accurate control of loading and strain in the sample Provider Technical Specification gt Rapid approach facility gt Audible alarm at limit of travel gt All steel construction stainless steel platen Triaxial load frame 50kN Speed range 0 00001 to 9 99999mm per minute Digitally controlled with RS232 interface Simple control buttons on the front panel provide fast slow up down and stop commands for platen movement A waterproof membrane seals the panel and digital disp
11. Absolute Accuracy Absolute Nominal Range V of Reading Accuracy at Temp Drift Full Scale Positive FS Negative FS 24 Hours 90 Days 1 Year Offset mV 10 10 0 0177 0 0197 0 0219 5 93 0 0005 8 127 Note Temp Drift applies only if ambient is greater than 10 C of previous external calibration Transfer Characteristics Relative accuracy INL After calibration 0 5 LSB typ 1 0 LSB max Before calibration 4 LSB max DNL After calibration 0 5 LSB typ 1 0 LSB max Before calibration 3 LSB max Monotonicity 12 bits guaranteed after calibration 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual A 14 ni com Appendix Specifications for Bus Offset error After calibration 1 0 mV max Before calibration 200 mV max Gain error relative to internal reference After calibration Before calibration Voltage Output R nge i sol adea ecu Output coupling esses Output impedance Current drive Protections ges EI Power on state steady state Initial power up glitch Magnitude esses Duration eee Power reset glitch Magnitude sess Duration eese EE Dynamic Chara
12. Bias 6 so Current Return v Paths _ 5 Ko Input Multiplexers Connector AISENSE Selected Channel in DIFF Configuration Figure 4 6 Differential Input Connections for Nonreferenced Signals Figure 4 6 shows two bias resistors connected in parallel with the signal leads of a floating signal source If you do not use the resistors and the source is truly floating the source is not likely to remain within the common mode signal range of the PGIA The PGIA then saturates causing erroneous readings National Instruments Corporation 4 15 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Chapter 4 Signal Connections 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual You must reference the source to AIGND The easiest way is to connect the positive side of the signal to the positive input of the PGIA and connect the negative side of the signal to AIGND as well as to the negative input of the PGIA without any resistors at all This connection works well for DC coupled sources with low source impedance less than 100 62 However for larger source impedances this connection leaves the DIFF signal path significantly out of balance Noise that couples electrostatically onto the positive line does not couple onto the negative line because it is connected to ground Hence this noise appears as a DIFF mode signal instead of a common mode signal and the does not reject it In this case instead o
13. 4 FS STRAIN SENSITIVITY See 10 VOLTS SENSITIVITY S mV V OPERATING NOTES OPERATING SPINDLE WITH RESIDUE FREE SOLVENT INHIBITOR TYPE CLEANER TRICHLOROETHANE OR SIMILAR m FOR REPETITIVE CYCLIC OPERATION LIGHTLY LUBRICATE ONLY WITH GENERAL PURPOSE SYNTHETIC INSTRUMENT OIL WINDSOR L 245X lt MIL L 6985A OR EQUIVALENT DO NOT OVER LUBRICATE USE SOFT JAW CLAMPS TO GRIP SPINDLE WHEN CHANGING ANVIL NOTE When Anvil is removed over travel of spindle could cause damage to internal mechanism CLAMP TRANSDUCER ON BODY DIAMETER ONLY MOUNTING CLAMP MC 150 OR MC 200 STRONGLY RECOMMENDED Weston Road Slough Berks 511 4HW TEL 0753 71241 FAX 0753 30364 TELEX 847301 WFGNG Figure 3 3 Wykeham Farrance volume change apparatus displacement transducer reference manual LSC HS25 9016 37 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax Calibration of LSC HS25 9016 GeoLab GIO 25 March 2004 MASTECH 30 0 25 0 4 5 0 y 0 395x 0 690 1 000 wx 2004 P E a e 15 0 Pad 8 ao s v4 o e o 10 0 et sae tad a 9 5 0 4 Vu 0 0 4i e i 0 0 10 0 20 0 30 0 40 0 50 0 60 0 Voltage mV 70 0 Figure 3 4 Wykeham Farrance volume change apparatus displacement transducer calibration 2004 05 25 LSC HS25 9016 Calibration of LSC HS25 9016 GeoLab GIO 15 June 2004 PCI 6024E 30 0 y 0 396x 0 111
14. 1 0 mV max 200 mV max Before calibration Gain error relative to internal reference After calibration 0 01 of output max Before calibration 0 75 of output max National Instruments Corporation 5 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Appendix 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Specifications for PCI and PXI Buses Voltage Output Output coupling Output Current drive eese Protection eere Power on state steady state Initial power up glitch Magnitude esses Duration eee Power reset glitch Dynamic Characteristics Settling time for full scale step Slew rate Midscale transition glitch Magnitude sess Duration eeeeee Stability Offset temperature coefficient Gain temperature coefficient 6 T 10 V ties 0 1 Q max 5 mA max Short circuit to ground 200 mV 1 1 V 2 0 ms 2 2 V 4 2 us 10 us to 0 5 LSB accuracy 10 V us 200 UV DC to 1 MHz 45 mV 2 0 us 50 uV C 25 ppm C ni com Digital 1 0 Appendix Specifications for PCI and P
15. 4 33 Figure 4 20 EXTSTROBE Signal Timing eere 4 34 Figure 4 21 Input Signal Timing eene 4 34 Figure 4 22 TRIG1 Output Signal Timing eere 4 35 Figure 4 23 TRIG2 Input Signal Timing eene 4 36 Figure 4 24 TRIG2 Output Signal Timing eene 4 36 Figure 4 25 STARTSCAN Input Signal 4 37 Figure 4 26 STARTSCAN Output Signal 4 37 Figure 4 27 Input Signal 4 38 Figure 4 28 Output Signal Timing see 4 39 Figure 4 29 SISOURCE Signal Timing eene 4 40 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual viii ni com Contents Figure 4 30 WFTRIG Input Signal Timing 4 41 Figure 4 31 WFTRIG Output Signal eee 4 41 Figure 4 32 UPDATE Input Signal Timing 4 42 Figure 4 33 UPDATE Output Signal 4 42 Figure 4 34 UISOURCE Signal Timing eene eee 4 43 Figure 4 35 GPCTRO SOURCE Signal 4 44 Figure 4 36 GPCTRO Signal Timing in Edge Detection 4 45 Figure 4 37 OUT Signal 4 45 Figure 4 38 GPCTRI SOURCE Signal Timing eere 4 46 Figure 4 39 Signal Timing in Edge Detection Mode 4 47 Figure 4 40 OUT Signal eene 4 47 Figure 4 41 GPCTR Timing Summary seen eee e
16. Compatibility cesses Input High Z 50 pull up to 5 Programmed I O 2 up down counter timers frequency scaler ni com Appendix Specifications for Bus Base clocks available Counter timers 20 MHz 100 kHz Frequency scalers 10 MHz 100 kHz Base clock 0 01 Max source 20 MHz Min source pulse duration 10 ns in edge detect mode Min gate pulse duration 10 ns in edge detect mode Data transfers ene eer ern Interrupts programmed I O Triggers Digital Trigger Compatibility TTL RESPONSE certet tte eene REDE Rising or falling edge 10 ns min Calibration Recommended warm up time 30 min Intetval ener 1 year External calibration reference gt lt 10 Onboard calibration reference Level iecit et 5 000 V 3 5 mV actual value stored in EEPROM Temperature coefficient 5 ppm C max Long term stability 15 ppm 41 000 h Power Requirement 3 VIDE 45 iiec eet 270 mA Note Excludes power consumed through available at the I O connector Power available at I O connector 4 65 to 5 25 VDC at 0 75 A National Instruments Corporation A 17 6023E 6024E 6025E
17. PE309914LF PE3502DJ00 PE3504BJ01 PE308722 PE340114LF PE340214LF PE350314LF PE350414LF PE350614LF PE351014LF PE351214LF PE351614LF PE352014LF PE352514LF PE354014LF PE364414LF PE364814LF PE365414LF PE366014LF PE366214LF PE366614LF PE367014LF The Handbook of WF GeoTriax cm 60 50 pressure 40 decreasing pressure 30 increasing 20 cell expansion immediate 50 100 200 400 600 800 1000 cell pressure kPa Figure 2 17 Typical curve of volume change of a triaxial chamber versus cell pressure Head 2 2 The WF chamber To provide maximum visibility the cell chamber is made from clear lucite type material which is stress relieved by Wykeham Farrance during manu facture Lateral plastic strips are used to ensure high resistance in high cell pressure The chamber is designed for water pressure only The use of air as chamber pressure medium without water is highly dangerous In the case where the volume change of the specimen is measured indi rectly i e from the volume of the water coming in or out of the cell the volume change pressure curve of the triaxial chamber is needed For this reason calibration curves are usually given in loading and unloading paths Typical behavior of triaxial chambers is shown in Figure 2 17 while for the WF11001 SN 100257 9 triaxial cell the calibration procedure showed that a mixed logarithmic linear regression curve may well approx
18. 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 u Adis LISTED PU 322 012 02 10C US Patent No D442 923S 2003 by PULS GmbH ArabellastraBe 15 ML30 102 Technische Daten Ausgang out Netzanschluf ACin Eingangsspannung Vin Nennwert 100 240 V AC Frequenz 47 63 Hz AC Dauerbetrieb 85 264 V AC DC Dauerbetrieb 85 375 V DC Eingangsstrom lin Nennwert lt 0 6 A 6100 V ACin 0 25 A 240 V ACin 17 5A 0 3A s 120Vin lpk Pt 36A 1 2A s 240Vin typ Ty 50 Kaltstart Netz gem EN 61000 3 3 Powerfaktor PFC Ger t erf llt EN 61000 3 2 Externe Absicherung f r Ger teschutz nicht erforderlich interne Sicherung nationale Vorschriften beachten Einschaltstrom AnschluBleitungen flexible Kabel starre Kabel Abisolieren am 0 3 2 5 mm AWG 28 12 0 3 4 mm AWG 28 12 6 mm empfohlen Nennspannung Vout Einstellbereich 10 12 V 8 minimal voreingestellt 2 10 V 0 5 ohne Br cke 12 V 0 5 mit Br cke stat lt 1 GV 10V stat 1 296 12V dyn 2 5 Vout Regelgenauigkeit Restwelligkeit 2 mVss Ripple Noise Spikes lt 10 mVss Zul Dauerbelastung bis zu 3 10 V lout bis zu 2 5 12 V bei Ty 10 C 60 C abh ngig von Einbaulage Vins Ty Siehe Fig 1 und Fig 2 f r Details 3 2 100 120 typ 3 5 230V vgl Kennlinie Fig 1
19. 2705 SH6868 EP 214 Shielded DAQCard 60xxE SCB 68 SHC6868 EP 214 Low cost PCI 6025E PXI 6025E Two TBX 68s SH1006868 214 Low cost PCI 60xxE PXI 60xxE CB 68LP R6868 214 Low Cost DAQCard 60xxE CB 68LP RC6868 214 Terminal Blocks do not provide signal conditioning ie filtering amplification isolation etc which may be necessary to increase the accuracy of your measurements Table 4 Recommended Accessories Ordering Information INTER CIE 60 778465 01 NI DAQCard 6036E 778561 01 6034 NI PXI 6025E 777798 01 60 777744 01 6024 778269 01 NI PCI 6024E NI PCI 6023E Includes NI DAQ driver software and calibration certificate BUY ONLINE Visit ni com dataacquisition 777743 01 777742 01 National Instruments e Tel 800 433 3488 info ni com ni com 3 Multifunction Overview Calibration DAC d 1 1 Anti I ji CHO l jasi 1 12 or 16 Bit Amplifier Pi Ang 1 ADC lt I 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 i i 1 E 12or 16 Bi CHX 1 Aliasing or 16 Bit 2 gt Amplifier RI Filter 1 ADC 1 1 Y ALFIFO E e 3 NI MITE Analog BUS gt Trigger g Circuty Digital Analog A Dod 8 Timing Control Request 1 1 Li Two 24 Bit NI Bus 22 Counter Timers DAQ STC Interface i 1 ERRAR 1 1 Digital 1 0 Timing RTSI
20. va HEXAL THY EA Bevit Aou 105 Xpyupvn napaan t v va v 10 AOHNA 171 23 3 Or OxuoUV GUVOAD TWV ava EISOR MEpiKOG eripepiayog guugovtac 4 etn auvnBuxs Aertoupyua 12 pnvev AvaAuriKot Eyyunone thy pac 5 15 000 Siypaypn ne n 8 210 9341533 amp 9359142 Fax 210 9359778 n E10 01 1 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax Operator GIO amp CHM Place GeoLab Date 2004 10 29 Time 17 30 Maximum compressive load 50 0kN Calibration constant 2 974kN mV Linearity 99 999 Excitation voltage 10 05Volts Voltage Sensitivity 2 0046mV V Sampling rate 1 000samples sec Temperature 25 00 Humidity 55 Table 2 7 STALC3 50kN 24937 Submersible Load Cell Calibration Table A submersible load cell is also installed in the triaxial cell to provide more accurate estimation of the axial force applied to the specimen A STALC3 50kN 24937 WF submersible load cell is mounted on the lower part of the loading ram inside the triaxial cell Table 2 7 summarises the specifications of the S ALC3 50kN load cell T he wiring connection of
21. 17 RS Type 249 T023096 Pore Pressure Port4 Calibration 2004 01 05 cu LX es he Bee end dk ke Se Ket EI Boh A 18 RS Type 249 T023096 Pore Pressure Port4 Calibration 2004 lr at esu us utu ast anh 18 Typical curve of volume change of a triaxial chamber versus cell pressure Head 19 Calibration of WF11001 SN 100257 9 triaxial cell under isotropic PTESSUTE Se gh poo ub lay 20 De airing valve on top of WF triaxial cell and strain arm post 21 Wykeham Farrance axial displacement transducer reference manual 15 550 9021 22 Wykeham Farrance axial displacement transducer calibra tion 2004 06 01 15 550 9021 23 Wykeham Farrance axial displacement transducer calibra tion 2004 07 10 15 650 9021 23 Wykeham Farrance axial displacement transducer LSC HS50 902 ret mon nat X ve eae aen us 24 Friction developed in the sliding contact of the piston with the triaxial bush 4 4 3 5 303 803 XR 25 DBBSE 50kN A2242 external load cell Applied Ltd 26 DBBSE 50kN A2242 external load cell reference manual 27 DBBSE 50kN A2242 external load cell calibration 2004 09 06 28 Wykeham Farrance STALC3 50kN triaxial submersible load Cell dee nete oat Ie Re PUE aisi dd 30 STALC3 50kN 24937 submersible load cell calibration 2004 10520 in ker eet dt fet
22. 2 776249 02 2 DO ATS ssi 776249 03 A Doard mee NN 776249 04 ecrire desees UII 776249 05 Extended 5 boards 777562 05 SH68 68 D1 Shielded Cable See Figure 9 Shielded 68 conductor cable terminated with two 68 pin female 0 050 series D type connectors This cable connects counter timer devices to accessories 183432 01 183432 02 R6868 Ribbon 1 0 Cable See Figure 10 68 conductor flat ribbon cable terminated with two 68 pin connectors Use this cable to connect the NI PCI 6601 to an accessory For signal integrity with high frequency signals use the SH68 68 D1 with the NI 6602 and NI 6608 182482 01 Custom Connectivity Components 68 Pin Custom Cable Connector Backshell Kit See Figure 11 68 pin female mating custom cable kit for use in making custom 68 conductor cables Solder cup contacts are available for soldering of cable wires to the connector 68 custom cable kit 776832 01 PCB Mounting Connectors Printed circuit board PCB connectors for use in building custom accessories that connect to 68 conductor shielded and ribbon cables Two connectors are available one for right angle and one for vertical mounting onto a PCB 68 pin male right angle 777600 01 68 pin male vertical 777601 01 392 National Instruments Tel 800 433 3488 Fax 512 683 9300 info ni com ni com Low Cost Series Multifunction 12 or 16 Bit
23. 4 ode Mexoqaray 2 Systems 150 001 2090 gt Ym No 4 9028 3241 09 2004 ti InAN OP IT M TOMEAZ MHXANIKHE HP 5 i 20 05773 Exoupe va aKohouGa nou OTL Moz ZYNOAO 113 63 340 89 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 000 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 ME 0 00 i 0 00 0 ano mg 0 00 E its KTOQ Brag ae AGHNA ZYNQAO 840 89 f 5l enA 18 61 36 Mpoedevon TUR 0 ZYNOAO 402 25 100 HETENTOIG ames 30 EURO and loonu a ge APAXMES 137 067 oA m i _WYKEHAM FARRANCE ENG LTD UK Ewoote am orotannort
24. Calibration of LSC HS50 9021 GeoLab GIO 10 July 2004 PCI 6024E 60 0 50 0 we y 1 414x 0 464 emn 1 000 wae 40 0 ew oo hd 30 0 eo 29 o POM ri d e 200 vea Lo 00 LM 10 0 4 Qn e Qn 0 0 4 0 0 5 0 10 0 15 0 20 0 25 0 30 0 35 0 40 0 Voltage mV Figure 2 22 Wykeham Farrance axial displacement transducer calibration 2004 07 10 LSC HS50 9021 23 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax Figure 2 23 Wykeham Farrance axial displacement transducer LSC HS50 9021 24 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax WF11001 SN 100257 9 triaxial cell bush friction angle of friction 1 720 1 60 1 40 0 0300 R 0 9970 1 20 1 00 0 80 0 60 Shear stress MPa 0 40 0 20 0 00 0 00 5 00 10 00 15 00 20 00 25 00 30 00 35 00 40 00 45 00 50 00 Normal stress o MPa Figure 2 24 Friction developed in the sliding contact of the piston with the triaxial bush A loading ram is also allowed to slide in the triaxial cell along the bush The loading ram or piston is precision engineered and it is fitted into the cell with a low friction low leakage assembly The watertightness of the contact between the piston and the bush is achieved via an O ring The loading ram applies the axial force to the top cap of the specimen during a triaxial test The axial force may be measured either by a load ri
25. Glossary RSE RTSI bus sample counter scan scan clock scan rate SCXI SE self calibrating sensor settling time signal conditioning 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual referenced single ended mode all measurements are made with respect to acommon reference measurement system or a ground Also called a grounded measurement system real time system integration bus the National Instruments timing bus that connects DAQ devices directly by means of connectors on top of the devices for precise synchronization of functions seconds samples the clock that counts the output of the channel clock in other words the number of samples taken On boards with simultaneous sampling this counter counts the output of the scan clock and hence the number of scans one or more analog samples taken at the same time or nearly the same time Typically the number of input samples in a scan is equal to the number of channels in the input group For example one scan acquires one new sample from every analog input channel in the group the clock controlling the time interval between scans the number of scans a system takes during a given time period usually expressed in scans per second Signal Conditioning eXtensions for Instrumentation single ended a term used to describe an analog input that is measured with respect to a common ground a property of a DAQ board that has an extremely stable onboard reference and
26. The 6025E device uses an 82C55A PPI to provide an additional 24 lines of digital I O that represent three 8 bit ports PA PB and PC You can program each port as an input or output port In Figure 4 11 port A of one PPI is configured for digital output and port B is configured for digital input Digital input applications include receiving TTL signals and sensing external device states such as the state of the switch in Figure 4 11 Digital output applications include sending 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual 4 22 ni com Chapter 4 Signal Connections TTL signals and driving external devices such as the LED shown in Figure 4 11 Port C Pin Assignments 6025 only The signals assigned to port depend on how 82 55 is configured In mode 0 or no handshaking configuration port C is configured as two 4 bit I O ports In modes 1 and 2 or handshaking configuration port is used for status and handshaking signals with any leftover lines available for general purpose I O Table 4 4 summarizes the port C signal assignments for each configuration You can also use ports A and B in different modes the table does not show every possible combination Note Table 4 4 shows both the port signal assignments and the terminology correlation between different documentation sources The 82C55A terminology refers to the different 82C55A configurations as modes whereas NI DAQ ComponentWorks LabWindows CVI and LabVIEW documentat
27. and signals connected to ACH lt 8 15 gt are routed to the negative input of the PGIA Caution Exceeding the DIFF and common mode input ranges distorts your input signals Exceeding the maximum input voltage rating can damage the device and the computer National Instruments is not liable for any damages resulting from such signal connections The maximum input voltage ratings are listed in the Protection column of Table 4 3 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual In NRSE mode the AISENSE signal connects internally to the negative input of the PGIA when their corresponding channels are selected In DIFF and RSE modes AISENSE is left unconnected AIGND is an analog input common signal that routes directly to the ground connection point on the devices You can use this signal for a general analog ground connection point to your device if necessary The PGIA applies gain and common mode voltage rejection and presents high input impedance to the analog input signals connected to your device Signals are routed to the positive and negative inputs of the through input multiplexers on the device The PGIA converts two input signals to a signal that is the difference between the two input signals multiplied by the 4 10 ni com Chapter 4 Signal Connections gain setting of the amplifier The amplifier output voltage is referenced to the ground for the device The A D converter ADC of your device measures this output voltage when it
28. deasserted 1 after the last conversion in the scan is initiated This output is set to high impedance at startup Figures 4 25 and 4 26 show the input and output timing requirements for the STARTSCAN signal 1 i i p Rising Edge Polarity 1 Falling Edge Polarity tw 10 ns minimum Figure 4 25 STARTSCAN Input Signal Timing ty 1 4 gt STARTSCAN ty 50 100 ns i a Start of Scan Start Pulse CONVERT STARTSCAN tog 10 ns minimum b Scan in Progress Two Conversions per Scan Figure 4 26 STARTSCAN Output Signal Timing The CONVERT pulses are masked off until the device generates the STARTSCAN signal If you are using internally generated conversions the first CONVERT appears when the onboard sample interval counter reaches zero If you select an external CONVERT the first external pulse after STARTSCAN generates a conversion Separate the STARTSCAN pulses by at least one scan period National Instruments Corporation 4 37 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Chapter 4 Signal Connections A counter on your device internally generates the STARTSCAN signal unless you select some external source This counter is started by the TRIGI signal and is stopped either by software or by the sample counter Scans generated by either an internal or external STARTSCAN signal are inhibited unless they occur within a DAQ sequence
29. lt T Description Minimum Maximum Tl WR 1 to OBF 0 150 T2 Data before STB 1 20 13 STB Pulse Width 100 T4 STB 0 to IBF 1 150 5 Data after STB 1 50 T6 ACK 0 to OBF 1 150 7 ACK Pulse Width 100 T8 ACK 0 to Output 150 T9 1 to Output Float 20 250 T10 RD 1 to 0 150 All timing values are in nanoseconds Figure 4 15 Timing Specifications for Mode 2 Bidirectional Transfer National Instruments Corporation 4 29 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Chapter 4 Signal Connections Power Connections Two pins on the 1 0 connector supply 5 V from the computer power supply through a self resetting fuse The fuse resets automatically within a few seconds after the overcurrent condition is removed These pins are referenced to DGND and you can use them to power external digital circuitry The power rating is 4 65 to 5 25 VDC at 1 A for the PCI and PXI devices and 4 65 to 45 25 VDC at 0 75A for PCMCIA cards UN Caution Under no circumstances connect these 5 V power pins directly to analog or digital grounds or to any other voltage source on the device or any other device Doing so can damage the device and the computer National Instruments is not liable for damages resulting from such a connection Timing Connections UN Caution Exceeding the maximum input voltage ratings which are listed in Table 4 3 can damage the device and th
30. 0 6A 100V ACin lt 0 25A 240V e Courant de miseen 17 5A 0 3A s 120V route I It 36A 1 2A7s 240V 50 C d part froid r seau selon EN 61000 3 3 Facteur de puissance PFC L appareil r pond la norme EN 61000 3 2 Protection externe pour protection de l appareil pas n cessaire protection interne observez des r giements nationaux Conduites de raccordement C bles souples 0 3 2 5 mm AWG 28 12 C bles rigides 0 3 4 mm AWG 28 12 Degainage en boutdu 6 recommand c ble Dimensions Poids Connector cables Largeur w 45 mm flexible cable 0 3 2 5 mm AWG 28 12 Hauteur h 75 mm solid cable 0 3 4 mm AWG 28 12 Profondeur d 91 mm profil stripping at cable end 6 mm recommended Poids 250g Environmental Data Refroidissement Ambient temperature T measured at 25 mm under the air input in the housing Storage Shipment 25 85 Full nominal load 10 60 Derated 60 70 Degree of protection 1 20 IEC60529 Safety Protection Read safety instructions See attached sheet Installation and Operation Safety and protection Overvoltageprotection Vout limitation at second side max 18 V e Resistant to overload Resistantto sustained short circuit Resistant to open P4 circuit Overtemperature protect Reverse power max 30 V immunity
31. 25 ppm C National Instruments Tel 800 433 3488 info ni com ni com 12 Bit E Series Multifunction Specifications Specifications NI 607xE NI 606xE NI 6040E NI 602xE continued Digital 1 0 Number of Channels 6025E 32 input output All others 8 input output 5VTIL Power on state Input high impedance Digital logic levels PO lt 0 7 gt Level Minimum V Maximum V Input low voltage 0 0 8 Input high voltage 2 0 5 0 Output low voltage l u 24 mA 0 4 Output high voltage lut 13 mA 4 35 1 lt 0 7 gt P2 lt 0 7 gt lt 0 7 gt Level Minimum V Maximum V Input low voltage 0 0 8 Input high voltage 22 5 0 Output low voltage lout 2 5 mA 0 4 Output high voltage lout 2 5 mA 37 Data Transfers 6025E Interrupts programmed 1 0 All others Programmed 1 0 Transfer rate 1 word 8 bits Maximum with NI DAQ system dependent Transfer Rate DAQPad 6070E 5 kwords s others 50 kwords s Constant sustainable 1 to 10 kwords s system dependent Timing 1 0 Number of channels Up down counter timers a2 Frequency sca 1 Resolution Up down counter timers 24 bits Frequency scaler 4 bits Compatibility Base clocks available Up down counter timers Frequency scaler 20 MHz and 100 kHz 10 MHz and 10
32. 30 50 C 1 2G 060 C 1 26 0 120 1 26 8 98 7001 PT8A447001 PT8A507001 PT8B987001 PT8B447001 PT8B507001 PYROMETER DN 63 FOR FUMES 201710 201720 201730 201740 TB 63 100 TB 63 150 TB 63 200 TB 63 300 0 500 C 0 500 C 0 500 C 0 500 C PT366870 PT376870 PT386870 PT396870 PRESSURE GAUGES WITH STAINLESS STEEL BOX SUBMERGED IN GLYCERINE DN 63 RADIAL 107110 107111 107112 107113 107120 107130 107140 107150 107160 107170 107180 107190 107200 107210 107220 107230 107240 107250 107260 107270 107280 107290 MG1 INOX 63 Box in stainless steel Transparent in polycarbonate with red hand Connection radial in brass G1 4B Pressure gauge element tubular spring in copper alloy 14 BAR inHG DN 63 G1 4B 1 1 5 BAR inHG DN 63 G 1 4B 143 BAR DN 63 G 1 4B 1 5 BAR DN 63 G 1 4B 0 1 BAR PSI DN 63 G 1 4B 0 1 6 BAR PSI DN 63 G1 4B 0 2 5 BAR PSI DN 63 G1 4B 0 4 BAR PSI DN 63 6 1 4B 0 6 BAR PSI DN 63 G 1 4B 0 10 BAR PSI DN 63 G1 4B 0 12 BAR PSI DN 63 G1 4B 0 16 BAR PSI DN 63 G1 4B 0 20 BAR PSI DN 63 G1 4B 0 25 BAR PSI DN 63 G1 4B 040 BAR PSI DN 63 G1 4B 0 60 BAR PSI DN 63 G1 4B 0 100 BAR PSI 63 G1 4B 0 160 BAR PSI 63 G1 4B 0250 BAR PSI DN 63 G1 4B 0315 BAR PSI DN 63 G1 4B 0400 BAR PSI DN 63 G1 4B 0600 BAR PSI DN 63 G1 4B
33. National Instruments Corporation G 7 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Glossary NI DAQ noise NRSE OUT PCI PFI PFIO TRIGI PFI1 TRIG2 PFI2 CONVERT PFI3 GPCTRI SOURCE PFI4 GPCTR1_GATE PFIS UPDATE PFI6 WFTRIG 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual National Instruments driver software for DAQ hardware an undesirable electrical signal Noise comes from external sources such as the AC power line motors generators transformers fluorescent lights soldering irons CRT displays computers electrical storms welders radio transmitters and internal sources such as semiconductors resistors and capacitors Noise corrupts signals you are trying to send or receive nonreferenced single ended mode all measurements are made with respect to a common measurement system reference but the voltage at this reference can vary with respect to the measurement system ground output pin a counter output pin where the counter can generate various TTL pulse waveforms Peripheral Component Interconnect a high performance expansion bus architecture originally developed by Intel to replace ISA and EISA It is achieving widespread acceptance as a standard for PCs and work stations it offers a theoretical maximum transfer rate of 132 Mbytes s programmable function input PFIO trigger 1 PFIl trigger 2 PFI2 convert PFI3 general purpose counter 1 source PFI4 general purpose counter 1 gate PFI5 update PFI6 waveform trigger
34. The DAQCard 6024E PCI 6023E PCI 6024E PCI 6025E and PXI 6025E devices are warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of shipment as evidenced by receipts or other documentation National Instruments will at its option repair or replace equipment that proves to be defective during the warranty period This warranty includes parts and labor The media on which you receive National Instruments software are warranted not to fail to execute programming instructions due to defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 90 days from date of shipment as evidenced by receipts or other documentation National Instruments will at its option repair or replace software media that do not execute programming instructions if National Instruments receives notice of such defects during the warranty period National Instruments does not warrant that the operation of the software shall be uninterrupted or error free A Return Material Authorization RMA number must be obtained from the factory and clearly marked on the outside of the package before any equipment will be accepted for warranty work National Instruments will pay the shipping costs of returning to the owner parts which are covered by warranty National Instruments believes that the information in this document is accurate The document has been carefully reviewed for technical accuracy In the event that technical or typographical errors ex
35. The DBBSE is ideally suited for weighing applications in food pharmaceutical brewing or any other plant that requires regular wash down for hygienic reasons There are many options that are available to further enhance the usefulness of this series of load cells and to assist engineers with on site installation Applied Measurements also offer a wide range of Instrumentation to meet most weighing system requirements We also offer a service advising customers on their specific control requirements from the weighing system Transducer Specialists APPLIED MEASUREMENTS LIMITED 3 MERCURY HOUSE CALLEVA PARK ALDERMASTON BERKSHIRE RG7 8PN UK Tel 44 0118 981 7339 Fax 44 0118 981 9121 email info appmeas co uk Internet www appmeas co uk ve Sig Green ve Exc Blue SPECIFICATION Gc ve Sig Yellow CHARACTERISTICS DBBSE Rated Capacities 10 25 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 5000 10 000 20 000 Rated Output 2 0 0 1 Zero Return after 30 mins Zero Balance Temperature Range Operating Compensated 0 0 Temperature Effect_On Output Safe Overload Ultimate Overload Excitation Recommended VAC rv Input Impedance 40 2 Output Impedance 1 y y Ohms Insulation Impedance Deflection at Rated Load 0 4 mm Weight without cable 10 to 500kg 0 6kg 1000kg to 2000kg 1 5kg 5000kg 3 4kg 10 000kg 6kg
36. Tritech triaxial load frame 50 cap 230 110 V 50 60 Hz 1 ph WF 10076 Tritech triaxial load frame 100 KN cap 230 110 V 50 60 Hz 1 ph General description The Tritech range of triaxial load frames has been designed to be used as part of a computer controlled triaxial system or as a stand alone unit The RS 232 interface enables the Tritech to be used with any computer The control buttons on the front panel provide fast slow up down and stop 99 z E commands for platen movement A waterproof membrane seals the panel IN TINI and digital display from water and dust rapid approach facility is provided to IE INI reduce set up time The automatic datum facility returns the Tritech to previous settings when switched on and micro switches prevent platen over travel The load frame is of rigid chromed steel twin column construction for rigidity at high loads All external parts are either stove enamel painted or chrome plated for corrosion protection The loading platen is made from stainless steel WF 10056 with accessories 26 Advanced Soil Mechanics Testing Systems W Wykeham Farrance Technical specifications Geotechnical Triaxial Tritech Triaxial load frames continued Models WF 10026 WF 10056 WF 10076 10 KN cap 50 KN cap 100 KN cap Maximum sample size 75 mm dia 105 mm dia 150 mm dia Minimum speed 0 00001 mm per minute 0 00001
37. 100 in parallel with 100 pF Powered off esses 4 min Overload 5 ette 4 min Input bias current 200 pA Input offset current eee 100 pA CMRR DC to 60 Hz Ga mn 0 5 1 0 seite ec 85 dB Gain 10 100 sess 90 dB Dynamic Characteristics Bandwidth Signal Bandwidth Small 3 dB 500 kHz Large 1 THD 225 kHz Settling time for full scale step 5 us max to 1 0 LSB accuracy System noise LSB not including quantization Gain Dither Off Dither On 0 5 to 1 0 10 0 65 10 0 45 0 65 100 0 70 0 90 Crosstalk 60 dB DC to 100 kHz Stability Recommended warm up time 30 min Offset temperature coefficient Pregain eiie 15 uV C 240 wV C National Instruments Corporation A 13 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Appendix Specifications for Bus Gain temperature coefficient 20 ppm C Analog Output Output Characteristics Number of channels 2 voltage 12 bits 1 in 4 096 Max update rate Interr pts ueteres 1 kHz system dependent DAC pei Double buffered multiplying FIFO buffer None Data Interrupts programmed Accuracy Information
38. 4 7 PC lt 0 7 gt signal description table 4 4 digital I O specifications A 7 signal summary table 4 7 PCI and PXI bus specifications See specifications PCMCIA bus specifications See specifications PFIO TRIGI signal description table 4 5 signal summary table 4 7 PFII TRIG2 signal description table 4 5 signal summary table 4 7 PFI2 CONVERT signal description table 4 5 signal summary table 4 7 PFI3 GPCTR1 SOURCE signal description table 4 5 signal summary table 4 7 PFI4 GPCTR1_GATE signal description table 4 5 signal summary table 4 8 PFIS UPDATE signal description table 4 6 signal summary table 4 8 PFI6 WFTRIG signal description table 4 6 signal summary table 4 8 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual PFI7 STARTSCAN signal description table 4 6 signal summary table 4 8 PFIS GPCTRO SOURCE signal description table 4 6 signal summary table 4 8 PFI9 GPCTRO GATE signal description table 4 6 signal summary table 4 8 PFIs programmable function inputs common questions C 4 to C 5 signal routing 3 8 to 3 0 timing connections 4 31 to 4 32 PGIA programmable gain instrumentation amplifier analog input modes 4 9 to 4 11 differential connections ground referenced signal sources figure 4 14 nonreferenced or floating signal sources 4 15 to 4 16 single ended connections floating signal sources figure 4 18 ground referenced signal sources figure 4 1
39. G 8 ni com PFI7 STARTSCAN PFI8 GPCTRO_ SOURCE PFI9 GPCTRO_GATE PGIA port PPI ppm pu pulse trains Q quantization error R referenced signal sources resolution ribbon cable rise time rms National Instruments Corporation G 9 Glossary PFI7 start of scan PFI8 general purpose counter 0 source PFI9 general purpose counter 0 gate programmable gain instrumentation amplifier 1 a digital port consisting of multiple I O lines on a DAQ device 2 a serial or parallel interface connector on a PC programmable peripheral interface parts per million pullup multiple pulses the inherent uncertainty in digitizing an analog value due to the finite resolution of the conversion process signal sources with voltage signals that are referenced to a system ground such as the earth or a building ground Also called grounded signal sources the smallest signal increment that can be detected by a measurement system Resolution can be expressed in bits in proportions or in percent of full scale For example a system has 12 bit resolution one part in 4 096 resolution and 0 0244 of full scale a flat cable in which the conductors are side by side the difference in time between the 10 and 90 points of a system s step response root mean square the square root of the average value of the square of the instantaneous signal amplitude a measure of signal amplitude 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual
40. PA5 GND PA3 PA2 GND PAO 5 N C N C N C N C N C N C N C N C N C A 68 67 C2 66 65 6 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 A 53 E 52 E N 51 A o 50 E 49 48 A 47 46 45 A o 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 PO 35 PC7 GND GND PC4 GND GND PC1 GND GND PB6 GND GND PB3 PB2 GND GND PA7 GND GND PA4 GND GND PA1 GND GND N C N C N C N C N C N C N C N C N C Figure B 2 68 Pin Extended Digital Input Connector Pin Assignments B 4 ni com National Instruments Corporation Appendix B Custom Cabling and Optional Connectors Figure B 3 shows the pin assignments for the 50 pin E Series connector AIGND ACHO ACH1 ACH2 ACH4 5 ACH6 ACH7 AISENSE DAC1OUT AOGND DIOO DIO1 DIO2 DIO3 5 EXTSTROBE PFH TRIG2 PFIS GPCTR1 SOURCE GPCTR1 OUT PFI6 WFTRIG PFIB GPCTRO SOURCE GPCTRO OUT NIAJ a AJN 9 E o 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
41. Using LabVIEW Measurement Studio or VirtualBench software greatly reduces the development time for your data acquisition and control application NI DAQ Driver Software The NI DAQ driver software shipped with your 6023E 6024E 6025E is compatible with you device It has an extensive library of functions that you can call from your application programming environment These functions allow you to use all features of your 6023E 6024E 6025E NI DAQ addresses many of the complex issues between the computer and the DAQ hardware such as programming interrupts NI DAQ maintains a consistent software interface among its different versions so that you can change platforms with minimal modifications to your code Whether you are using LabVIEW Measurement Studio or other programming languages your application uses the NI DAQ driver software as illustrated in Figure 1 1 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual 1 4 ni com Chapter 1 Introduction Conventional LabVIEW Programming Environment Measurement Studio or VirtualBench NI DAQ Driver Software ZN ZEE Computer or Bits Personal SCXI Hardware Workstation Figure 1 1 The Relationship Between the Programming Environment NI DAQ and Your Hardware To download a free copy of the most recent version of NI DAQ click Download Software at ni com Optional Equipment National Instruments offers a variety of products to u
42. handles The length of the chamber is suitable for submersible load cells In addition WF provides a service to adapt cells to accommodate special testing requirements Triaxial cells Code WF 10201 WF10751 WF11001 WF11144 Nominal size mm 38 70 100 150 Max specimen size mm 35 50 38 71 50 105 100 150 Max working pressure kPa 2000 3400 2000 2000 Max height mm 410 500 564 650 Diameter mm 350 400 440 500 Weight kg 7 15 Pill 40 Induding valves General specifications Light alloy construction stainless steel Standard length chamber accepts ram and O ring seal Built in cell ram damp Indudes pillar and anvil for strain dial gauge or transducer Five on off no volume change valves fitted as standard Sample sizes between 35 mm and 150 mm dia submersible load cells Rapid assembly design Cells are designed to accommodate specimen with a length twice its diameter Conversion sets The sets listed are used to test smaller sample sizes in the 70 mm 100 mm and 150 mm triaxial cells Each set consists of a pedestal top cap and drainage lead WF 11121 Conversion set for testing 38 mm samples in WF 10751 70 mm triaxial cell WF 11122 Conversion set for testing 1 4 in samples in WF 10751 70 mm triaxial cell WF 11125 Conversion set for testing 50 mm samples in WF 10751 70 mm triaxial cell WF 11136 Conversion set for testing 50 mm samples in WF 11001 100 mm tria
43. these pins are fused for up to 1 A of 5 V supply on the PCI and PXI devices or up to 0 75 A from a DAQCard device The fuse is self resetting 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual 4 4 ni com Chapter 4 Signal Connections Table 4 2 1 0 Connector Signal Descriptions Continued Signal Name Reference Direction Description SCANCLK DGND Output scan clock this pin pulses once for each A D conversion in scanning mode when enabled The low to high edge indicates when the input signal can be removed from the input or switched to another signal EXTSTROBE DGND Output External strobe you can toggle this output under software control to latch signals or trigger events on external devices PFIO TRIGI DGND Input PFIO Trigger 1 as an input this is one of the programmable function inputs PFIs PFI signals are explained in the Timing Connections section in this chapter As an output this is the TRIGI AI start trigger signal Output In posttrigger data acquisition sequences a low to high transition indicates the initiation of the acquisition sequence In pretrigger applications a low to high transition indicates the initiation of the pretrigger conversions PFI1 TRIG2 DGND Input PFI1 Trigger 2 as an input this is one of the PFIs Output As an output this is the TRIG2 AI stop trigger signal In pretrigger applications a low to high transition indicates the initiation of the posttrigger conversions TRI
44. you can test all of your device functionality before you begin development Scaled Channels Easily scale your voltage data into the proper engineering units using the NI DAQ Measurement Ready virtual channels by choosing from a list of common sensors and signals or creating your own custom scale LabVIEW Integration NI DAQ functions create the waveform data type which carries acquired data and timing information directly into more than 400 LabVIEW built in analysis routines for display of results in engineering units on a graph For information on device support in NI DAQ 7 visit ni com dataacquisition Visit ni com oem for quantity discount information National Instruments Tel 800 433 3488 info ni com ni com 2 Low Cost E Series Multifunction DAQ 12 or 16 Bit 200 kS s 16 Analog Inputs Worldwide Support and Services NI provides you with a wealth of resources to help you get your application up and running more quickly including Technical Support Purchase of NI hardware or software gives you access to application engineers all over the world as well as Web resources with more than 3 000 measurement examples and more than 9 000 KnowledgeBase entries ni com support NI Factory Installation Services FIS Software and hardware installed in PXI and PXI SCXI systems tested and ready to use ni com advisor Calibration Includes NIST traceable basic calibration certificates for AN
45. 0 00001 and 5 99999 mm min at any time 43 UP DOWN TRAVEL SWITCH If either the Up or Down switch is pressed the control board latches onto the signal and causes the platen to be raised or lowered at the selected speed Correct operation is indicated by a green flashing light inside the switch If the platen reaches its limit the green switch indicator ceases to flash When this condition occurs the STOP switch has to be pressed before another operation can be carried out 44 RAPID TRAVEL SWITCHES By holding either of the rapid travel switches in their ON state the platen can be raised or lowered rapidly The direction of travel is indicated by a green flashing light inside the switch When the limit is reached this light will be constantly on If the switch is released the red Stop light will be illuminated after a short period The unit is then ready for its next operation 4 5 RS232 25 WAY D CONNECTOR When the RS232 connector at the rear of the TRITECH 50 is connected to a computer this allows the machine to be completely computer controlled PIN NO TRITECH 50 COMPUTER COMMENT 2 RX TX COMPUTER TRANSMIT DATA 3 TX RX COMPUTER RECEIVE DATA 7 GND GND SIGNAL GROUND 5 TRITECH 50 FUNCTIONS It is recommended that before any test commences the platen is a minimum of 10 mm from the lower limit Before starting the test set the crosshead beam to its correct position by adjusting the location nuts To ensure that the b
46. 0 061 0 064 0 163 0 176 0 05 0 05 0 035 0 091 0 100 0 0611 0 106 0 069 10 0 0 976 1 232 6 765 7 269 0 1 992 2 119 5 391 5 645 2 0 0 802 0 850 2 167 2 271 1 0 0 405 0 428 1 092 1 146 05 0 0 207 0 242 0 558 0 583 0 2 0 0 098 0 111 0 235 0 247 0 1 0 0 059 0 059 0 127 0 135 Note Accuracies are valid for measurements following an internal calibration Measurement accuracies are listed for operational temperatures within 1 of internal calibration temperature and 10 C of external or factory calibration temperature One year calibration interval recommended The Absolute Accuracy at Full Scale calculations were performed for a maximum range input voltage for example 10 V for the 10 V range after one year assuming 100 pt averaging of data Smallest detectable voltage change in the input signal at the smallest input range Table 2 Low Cost E Series Analog Input Absolute Accuracy Specifications Full Featured E Series Low Cost E Series Basic Models NI 6030E NI 6031E NI 6052E NI 6070 NI 6071E NI 6040E PCI 6036E PCI 6024E NI 6025E NI 6013 NI 6014 NI 6032E NI 6033E Nominal Range V Positive FS Negative FS Absolute Accuracy mV 10 10 143 1 405 8 127 8 127 2 417 8 127 3 835 10 0 1 201 1 176 5 685 5 685 Table 3 Low Cost Series Analog Output Absolute Accuracy Specifications RTSI or PXI Trigger Bus Us
47. 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 Not available on the 6023E AIGND ACH8 ACH9 ACH10 ACH11 ACH12 ACH13 ACH14 ACH15 DACOOUT RESERVED DGND DIO4 DIO5 DIO6 DIO7 45V SCANCLK PFIO TRIG1 PFI2 CONVERT PFIA GPCTR1 GATE PFI5 UPDATE PFI7 STARTSCAN PFI9 GPCTRO_GATE FREQ_OUT Figure B 3 50 Pin E Series Connector Pin Assignments B 5 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Custom Cabling and Optional Connectors 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Figure B 4 shows the pin assignments for the 50 pin extended digital input connector PC7 PC6 PC5 PC4 PC3 PC2 PC1 PCO PB7 PB6 PB5 PB4 PB3 PB2 PB1 PBO PA7 PA6 PA5 4 PA2 PA1 PAO 5 oo 11 13 19 21 31 41 AJN 8 10 12 14 15 17 16 18 20 22 24 23 25 27 26 28 30 29 32 33 35 37 39 42 43 45 47 34 36 38 40 44 46 48 50 49 GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND Figure B 4 50 Pin Extended Digital Input Connector Pin Assignments B 6 ni com Common Questions This appendix contains a list of commonly asked questions and
48. 20 000kg 8 3kg Construction Stainless Steel PO PO Environmental Protection IP65 upto 100kg IP68 from 250kg 3 Metre 4 Core Screened Thread All dimensions mm Both Ends RANGE kg A Ww H OD Thread T 10 25 50 100 35 72 5 70 l6 18 75 M8 x 1 25 250 500 35 72 5 70 16 24 5 75 MI2x 1 75 1000 2000 45 95 95 28 30 100 M20 x 1 5 5000 57 5 120 120 34 40 125 M24 x2 10 000 65 140 145 40 55 150 M30 x2 20 000 90 190 190 60 75 200 M45 x 3 APPLIED MEASUREMENTS LIMITED to Continuous product development may result in minor changes to published specifications CALIBRATION CERTIFICATE Calibration of Transducer Date 27 August 2004 Customer Neotek O E P Xystris amp Co Venizelou 105 N Smyrni 171 22 Athens Greece Customer Order Ref 24112 AML Order Ref 120704D Calibration Resuits 25658 Transducer Type Serial No Load Rating Proof Rating Zero Output Full Scale Output Non Linearity Hysteresis Supply Voltage Insulation Resistance Electrical Connections Blue ve supply CCG 200kN 25010 200kN 300kN 0 129mV 10Vdc 1 247mV V 0 19 FS 0 14 FS 10Vdc gt 1000 megohms at 100Vdc Red ve supply APPLIED MEASUREMENTS LIMITED 3 MERCURY HOUSE CALLEVA PARK ALDERMASTON BERKSHIRE RG7 BPN UK Tel 444 0118 981 7339 Fox 444 011
49. 200 kS s 16 Analog Inputs E Series Low Cost 16 analog inputs at up to 200 kS s Operating Systems 12 or 16 bit resolution Windows 2000 NT XP Up to 2 analog outputs at 10 kS s Real time performance 12 or 16 bit resolution with LabVIEW 8 digital I O lines TTL CMOS Others such as Linux two 24 bit counter timers and Mac OS X Digital triggering 4 analog input signal ranges LabVIEW NI DAQ driver simplifies configuration and measurements i Measurement Studio Families VI Logger PANGE Other Compatible Software ME Visual Basic and C NI 6025E isual Basic an NI 6024E Driver Software included NI 6023E NI DAQ 7 Recommended Software Calibration Certificate Included Analog Analog Input Max Input Family Bus Inputs Resolution Sampling Rate Range NI 6036E PCI PCMCIA 16 SE 8 DI 16 bits 200 kS s 0 05 to 10 V NI 6034E PCI 16 SE 8 DI 16 bits 200 kS s 0 05 to 10 V NI 6025E PCI 16 SE 8 DI 12 bits 200 kS s 0 05 to 10 V 6024E PCI PCMCIA 16 SE 8 DI 12 bits 200 kS s 0 05 to 10 V 6023E PCI 16 SE 8 DI 12 bits 200 kS s 30 05 to 10 V Output Output Output Outputs Resolution Rate Range Digital l O Counter Timers Triggers 2 16 bits 10 kS s 10V 8 2 24 bit Digital 0 8 2 24 bit Digital 1 12 bits 10 kS s 10V 8 2 24 bit Digital 2 12 bits 10 kS s 10V 8 2 24 bit Digital 0 8 2 24 bit Digital 110 kS s typical when using the singl
50. 4 46 to 4 47 GPCTR1_OUT signal description table 4 5 general purpose timing signal connections 4 47 signal summary table 4 8 GPCTR1_SOURCE signal 4 46 GPCTR1_UP_DOWN signal 4 47 to 4 49 ground referenced signal sources description 4 9 differential connections 4 14 single ended connections NRSE configuration 4 18 to 4 19 H hardware configuration 2 3 installation 2 2 to 2 3 hardware overview analog input 3 2 to 3 6 dithering 3 4 to 3 5 input modes 3 2 to 3 3 input range 3 3 analog output 3 6 block diagram 6023E 6024E 6025E devices 3 1 DAQCard 6024E 3 2 digital I O 3 7 timing signal routing 3 7 to 3 11 device and RTSI clocks 3 9 programmable function inputs 3 8 to 3 9 RTSI triggers 3 9 to 3 11 ni com IBF signal description table 4 25 mode input timing figure 4 27 mode 2 bidirectional timing figure 4 29 input modes 3 2 to 3 3 See also analog input input range exceeding common mode input ranges caution 4 10 measurement precision table 3 3 overview 3 3 installation common questions C 2 hardware 2 2 to 2 3 software 2 1 unpacking 6023E 6024E 6025E 2 1 INTR signal description table 4 26 mode input timing figure 4 27 mode output timing figure 4 28 mode 2 bidirectional timing figure 4 29 connectors 4 1 to 4 8 exceeding maximum ratings warning 4 1 I O connector details table 4 1 optional connectors B 2 to B 6 50 pin E Series connector pin a
51. 48 Counter Timer Accessories and Cables SCB 68 Shielded 1 0 Connector Block See Figure 3 Shielded I O connector block for easy connection of I O signals to the counter timer devices The screw terminals are housed in a metal enclosure for protection from noise corruption Combined with a shielded cable the SCB 68 provides rugged very low noise signal termination The SCB 68 also includes two general purpose breadboard areas Reg 776844 01 Dimensions 19 5 by 15 2 by 4 5 cm 7 7 by 6 0 by 1 8 in Figure 3 SCB 68 Shielded 1 0 Connector Block TB 2715 Terminal Block See Figure 4 sajqe pue 1 1 2 With the TB 2715 terminal block for PXI counter timer devices you can connect signals directly without additional cables Screw terminals provide easy connection of signals The TB 2715 latches to front of your PXI module with locking screws and provides strain relief TB 2715 MR 778242 01 Dimensions 8 43 by 10 41 by 2 03 cm 3 32 by 4 1 by 0 8 in TBX 68 1 0 Connector Block with DIN Rail Mounting See Figure 5 Termination accessory with 68 screw terminals for easy connection of field I O signals Figure 4 78 2715 Terminal Block to the counter timer devices The TBX 68 is mounted in a protective plastic base with hardware for mounting on a standard DIN rail 777141 01 Dimensions 12 50 by
52. 5 10 CONSTANT SHUNT 100k ohms NOMINAL 25 max pulsed CALIBRATION DATA GAUGE FACTOR SET 2 0 TEST VOLTS 5 21 VDC TEMPERATURE 20 FS SPINDLE DISPLACEMENT O O 29 LINEARITY 2 74 FS STRAIN sensitivity 141 2 29 i0 5 MM VOLTS SENSITIVITY 5 6 OPERATING NOTES OPERATING SPINDLE WITH RESIDUE FREE SOLVENT INHIBITOR TYPE CLEANER TPICHLOROETHANE OR SIMILAR FOR REPETITIVE CYCLIC OPERATION LIGHTLY LUBRICATE ONLY WITH GENERAL PURPOSE SYNTHETIC INSTRUMENT OIL WINDSOR L 245X MIL L 6985A OR EQUIVALENT DO NOT OVER LUBRICATE USE SOFT JAW CLAMPS TO GRIP SPINDLE WHEN CHANGING ANVIL NOTE When Anvil is removed over travel of spindle could cause damage to internal mechanisms CLAMP TRANSDUCER ON BODY DIAMETER ONLY MOUNTING CLAMP MC 150 OR MC 200 STRONGLY RECOMMENDED Weston Road Slough Berks SLi 4HW TEL 0753 71241 FAX 0753 30364 TELEX 847301 WFGNG G Figure 2 20 Wykeham Farrance axial displacement transducer reference manual L C HS50 9021 22 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax Calibration of LSC HS50 9021 GeoLab GIO 01 June 2004 MASTECH 60 0 50 0 9 e y 1 407x 0 302 wet 1 000 a E 40 0 o e 009 n E 900 e e o 5 e a e 200 en uet eo 10 0 oe Pi 02 ent 0 0 5 0 10 0 15 0 20 0 25 0 30 0 35 0 40 0 Voltage mV Figure 2 21 Wykeham Farrance axial displacement transducer calibration 2004 06 01 LSC HS50 9021
53. 6 Calibration of Wykeham Farrance 50kN triaxial frame WF10056 SN 100175 7 displacement rate upwards direction Handbook for use with WEF 10056 TRITECH 50 triaxial load frame of 50 Capacity WYKEHAM FARRANCE ENGINEERING LIMITED Telephone 44 0753 571241 Weston Road Telefax 44 0753 811313 Trading Estate Telex 847301 WFENG Slough Berks SL1 4HW England TRITECH 50 MANUAL VERSION 1 CONTENTS 1 INTRODUCTION 2 SPECIFICATIONS 3 INSTALLATION 4 CONTROLS DESCRIPTION 5 TRITECH 50 FUNCTIONS 6 COMPUTER FUNCTIONS 7 MAINTENANCE APPENDICES Appendix i FAULT DIAGNOSIS Appendix ii TRITECH BLOCK DIAGRAM Appendix iii TRITECH CPU MODULE VERSION 1 Appendix iv TRITECH DISPLAY MODULE VERSION 1 TRITECH ASSEMBLY WIRING DIAGRAM Page No AANA m N gt INTRODUCTION The WF10056 TRITECH 50 Machine has been designed using the most up to date microprocessor controlled electronic drive unit and modern stepper motor technology The TRITECH 50 has been specifically designed for the testing of triaxial soil specimens It will also perform compression and flexural tests over a wide range of materials up to it s maximum load of 50 KN The speed of the given test can be varied at any time during the test by the operator altering the thumbwheel switch on the front panel The speed control of the TRITECH 50 is calibrated in mm min engineering units which is indicated digitally This
54. Both parts are usually made of stainless steel so as to reduce the weight and increase their resistance to pressure and rust in case the cell pressure is applied through de aired water The Handbook of WF GeoTriax Figure 2 1 Wykeham Farrance WF11001 SN 100257 9 triaxial cell 12 0 e 200 E 60 0 E zn 30 0 cu AO 94 S 336 0 270 0 16 0 Figure 2 2 Side and top view of Wykeham Farrance WF11001 SN 100257 9 triaxial cell WYKEHAM FARRANCE ENGINEERING LIMITED Weston Road Slough Berks SL1 4HW Telephone 0753 571241 Telefax 0753 811313 Telex 847301 WFEN TRIAXIAL CELLS INTRODUCTION This instruction manual covers Wykeham Farrance Triaxial cells with the following part numbers WF10201 WF 10751 WF 10001 WF11144 The standard Wykeham Farrance Triaxial cells are manufactured primarily from a light alloy material of a non corrosive specification Each model of cell has detachable base platens these are sometimes referred to as pedestals or pressure pads Our catalogue shows the different platen sizes available for each cell together with part numbers of various ancillary items for each size Platens of other sizes can be manufactured to order TYPES OF CELL The ADVANCED RANGE cells have banded perspex chambers the design incl
55. Devices ett dede tarte Programmable Peripheral Interface PPI Port PinvASSiS nM Ents oerte P wer p States etse sema entienden nte Changing DIO Power up State to Pulled Low Timing Specifications e A Mode 1 Input Timing e p E ds Mode 1 Output Timing uo gute e e ee ER e e ee Mode 2 Bidirectional Timing esee ree Power Connections i ute dte e ER Ea e RR rte eee Timing CofnectiOnS rei le e UR E ee e e ee Programmable Function Input Connections DAQ Timing Gonnections rci rre e repere eee penes SCANCLK Signal ue e rte ieee EXTSTROBE Sigpn alz eee eere e ERES TRIGI Signal ase nba Nep TRIG2 Signal eta tet tete dete te diee STARTSCAN Signal hee Gee CONVERT Signal eti AIGATE Sign l o elles e Ente SISOURGE ertet rr UR hes sis 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual vi ni com Contents Waveform Generation Timing Connections 4 40 WETETRIG Signal nii 4 40 UPDATE Sigtial UR REM Rete 4 41 UISOURCE Signal 5 1 en e eit 4 42 General Purpose Timing Signal Connections eee 4 43 GPCTRO SOURCE Signal 4 43 GPCTRO GATE Signal iet eese tech 4 44 Signal rade 4 45 GPCTRO UP DOWN Signal 4 45 1 SOURCE 12
56. Green output Yellow ve output Applied Measurements Limited hereby certifies that the above items have been inspected tested and calibrated in all respects with the requirements of the customer s order EN t APPLIED MEASUREMENTS LIMITED MERCURY HOUSE CALLEVA PARK ALDERMASION _ BERKSHIRE RG7 8PN UK Te 444 0118 981 7339 Fax 44 0118 981 9121 email irfo amp appmeas Director PETER LEWIS Reg 2583968 Figure 2 26 DBBSE 50kN A2242 external load cell reference manual 27 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax Compressive Load 60 0 Calibration of Load Cell DBBSE 50kN A2242 GeoLab GIO amp CHM 06 September 2004 PCI 6024E a o BR o o w o 5 o 4 eo o y 2 430 0 194 1 000 0 0 2 5 5 0 7 5 10 0 12 5 15 0 17 5 20 0 22 5 25 0 Voltage mV Figure 2 27 DBBSE 50kN A2242 external load cell calibration 2004 09 06 28 CALIBRATION CERTIFICATE Calibration of Transducer APPLIED Date 21 May 2004 MEASUREMENTS LIMITED Customer 3 MERCURY HOUSE Neotek O E P Xystris amp Co CALLEVA PARK _ E Venizelou 105 ALDERMASTON N Smyrni 171 22 BERKSHIRE Athens RG7 8PN Greece UK Te 444 0118 981 7339 Fax 44 0118 981 9121 Customer Order Ref 24067 AML Order Ref 8130504B email Irter ot wesw co uk Calibrat
57. IR E eere grege ticus 30 STALC3 50kN 24937 submersible load cell reference manual 31 Wykeham Farrance volume change apparatus photo taken from WF web site 34 Wykeham Farrance volume change apparatus front panel WF17044 SN 107584 7 35 Wykeham Farrance volume change apparatus displacement transducer reference manual LSC HS25 9016 37 Wykeham Farrance volume change apparatus displacement transducer calibration 2004 05 25 LSC HS25 9016 38 Wykeham Farrance volume change apparatus displacement transducer calibration 2004 06 15 LSC HS25 9016 38 Wykeham Farrance volume change apparatus displacement transducer 5 625 9016 39 Wykeham Farrance volume change apparatus WF17044 SN 107584 LIST FIGURES 41 4 2 4 8 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 The WF GeoDaq System 42 External view of WF GeoDaq terminal box 42 Internal view of WF GeoDaq terminal box 42 Instructions for mounting the terminal box 1 43 Instructions for mounting the terminal box 2 44 WF GeoDaq terminal box spare parts 45 Typical DIN 5 pin 240 pole type cable plugs 46 CB 68LP connector 47 Analog digital input output data acquisition card NI PCI oh Mary dh ee verior Bees be GS 47 4 10 The Labview v 7 1 interface 49
58. Library is functionally equivalent to NI DAQ software Measurement Studio which includes LabWindows CVI tools for Visual C and tools for Visual Basic is a development suite that allows you to use ANSI C Visual and Visual Basic to design your test and measurement software For C developers Measurement Studio includes LabWindows CVI a fully integrated ANSI C application development environment that features interactive graphics and the LabWindows CVI Data Acquisition and Easy I O libraries For Visual Basic developers Measurement Studio features a set of ActiveX controls for using National Instruments DAQ hardware These ActiveX controls provide a high level National Instruments Corporation 1 8 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction programming interface for building virtual instruments For Visual C developers Measurement Studio offers a set of Visual C classes and tools to integrate those classes into Visual C applications The libraries ActiveX controls and classes are available with Measurement Studio and the NI DAQ software VirtualBench features virtual instruments that combine DAQ products software and your computer to create a stand alone instrument with the added benefit of the processing display and storage capabilities of your computer VirtualBench instruments load and save waveform data to disk in the same forms that can be used in popular spreadsheet programs and word processors
59. N 51 50 49 A 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 oO 35 AIGND ACH9 ACH2 AIGND 11 AISENSE ACH12 AIGND ACH14 ACH7 AIGND AOGND AOGND DGND DIOO DIO5 DGND DIO2 DIO7 DIO3 SCANCLK EXTSTROBE DGND PFI2 CONVERT PFI3 GPCTR1_SOURCE PFl4 GPCTR1_GATE GPCTR1_OUT DGND PFI7 STARTSCAN PFI8 GPCTRO_SOURCE DGND DGND Figure 4 1 1 0 Connector Pin Assignment for the 6023E 6024E 4 2 Chapter 4 Signal Connections AIGND AIGND ACHO ACH8 1 ACH9 ACH2 ACH10 ACH3 ACH11 ACH4 ACH12 5 ACH13 ACH6 ACH14 ACH7 ACH15 AISENSE DACOOUT DAC1OUT RESERVED AOGND DGND DIOO 0104 DIO1 DIO5 DIO2 DIO6 0103 007 DGND 5V 5V SCANCLK EXTSTROBE PFIO TRIG1 PFH TRIG2 PFI2 CONVERT PFI3 GPCTR1_SOURCE PFI4 GPCTR1_GATE GPCTR1_OUT PFI5 UPDATE PFI6 WFTRIG PFI7 STARTSCAN PFIB GPCTRO SOURCE PFIS GPCTRO GATE GPCTRO OUT FREQ OUT 1 51 PC7 2 52 GND 3 53 4 54 GND 5 55 PC5 6 56 GND 7 57 PC4 9 59 10 60 11 61 2 12 62 13 63 PC1
60. PXI 1 DOFIFO 8 Control Trigger Bus 3 1 1 1 z _ DACO i AOFIFO 5 d 1 Calibration On Selected 1 cc USER DAC S Series Devices 1 1 Figure 1 S Series Hardware Block Diagram Calibration DAC Analog gt NI 16 PGIA lt gt gt Li 1 1 1 1 1 E A 1 75 1 gt i i NI MITE 5 lt i Analog 1 i Bus 5 Trigger Interface 3 Circui PFI z EM Digital Analog Al i z 1 8 S TS Timing Control Request 1 1 Two2 bit NI Bus E Counter Timers DAQ STC Interface 1 1 Li 1 lt DIAO Timing RTSI PXI i DO FIFO 8 Control Trigger Bus 3 Li E E 1 LI 1 1 AO FIFO 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 i 4 Calibration 1 1 On Selected E 1 DACA DAC i Series Devices LI 1 Figure 2 Series Hardware Block Diagram National Instruments Tel 800 433 3488 info ni com ni com 4 12 Bit E Series Multifunction Specifications Specifications NI 607xE NI 6062E NI 6040E NI 602xE These specifications are typical for 25 unless otherwise noted Analog Input Input Characteristics Number of Channels 6070E 16 single ended or 8 differential 6062E software selectable per channel 6040 602xE 6071E 64 single ended or 32 differential software selectable per c
61. Scans occurring within a DAQ sequence can be gated by either the hardware AIGATE signal or software command register gate CONVERT Signal Any PFI pin can externally input the CONVERT signal which is available as an output on the PFI2 CONVERT pin Refer to Figures 4 17 and 4 18 for the relationship of CONVERT to the DAQ sequence As an input CONVERT signal is configured in the edge detection mode You can select any PFI pin as the source for CONVERT and configure the polarity selection for either rising or falling edge The selected edge of the CONVERT signal initiates an A D conversion The ADC switches to hold mode within 60 ns of the selected edge This hold mode delay time is a function of temperature and does not vary from one conversion to the next Separate the CONVERT pulses by at least 5 us 200 kHz sample rate As an output the CONVERT signal reflects the actual convert pulse that is connected to the ADC This is true even if the conversions are externally generated by another PFI The output is an active low pulse with a pulse width of 50 to 150 ns This output is set to high impedance at startup Figures 4 27 and 4 28 show the input and output timing requirements for the CONVERT signal Polarity Rising Edge 1 t 1 Falling Edge Polarity tw 10 ns minimum 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Figure 4 27 CONVERT Input Signal Timing 4 38 ni com Chap
62. Specifications for PCMCIA Bus Analog Input National Instruments Corporation 11 Input Characteristics Number of channels 16 single ended or 8 differential software selectable per channel Type Of ADC iit Successive approximation Resolution 12 bits 1 in 4 096 Sampling 200 kS s guaranteed Input signal ranges Bipolar only Board Gain Software Selectable Range 0 5 10 V 1 5 V 10 500 mV 100 50 mV Input coupling eee DC Max working voltage signal common mode Each input should remain within 11 V of ground Overvoltage protection Signal Powered On Powered Off lt 0 15 gt 42 35 AISENSE 40 25 FIFO buffer 2048 S Data Interrupts programmed Configuration memory 17 512 words 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Appendix Specifications for Bus Accuracy Information Absolute Accuracy Relative Accuracy Noise Quantization Absolute Nominal Range V of Reading mV Accuracy Resolution mV Temp at Full Positive Negative Offset Drift Scale FS FS 24 Hours 1 Year mV Single Pt Averaged C mV Single Pt Averaged 10 10 0 0872 0 0914 8 83 3 91 1 042 0 0010 19 012 5 89 1
63. User Manual Appendix Specifications for PCMCIA Bus Physical card type eee Type II 68 position VHDCI female connector Environment Operating temperature 0 to 40 with a maximum internal device temperature of 70 as measured by onboard temperature sensor Storage temperature eese 20 to 70 C Relative humidity 10 to 95 non condensing 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual A 18 ni com Custom Cabling and Optional Connectors This appendix describes the various cabling and connector options for the DAQCard 6024E PCI 6023E PCI 6024E PCI 6025E and PXI 6025E devices Custom Cabling National Instruments offers cables and accessories for you to prototype your application or to use if you frequently change device interconnections If you want to develop your own cable however use the following guidelines e Forthe analog input signals shielded twisted pair wires for each analog input pair yield the best results assuming that you use differential inputs Tie the shield for each signal pair to the ground reference at the source e Route the analog lines separately from the digital lines e When using a cable shield use separate shields for the analog and digital parts of the cable Failure to do so results in noise coupling into the analog signals from transient digital signals The following lis
64. amp e Measuring amp Testing Systems ANO Ap 2 4079 rou ISO 9001 2000 nou etapia avayka a id OUUTIANPWON TOU EVTUTIOU AT Tou UAIKOU To Urroyp derai Kal Eraip a pe p 210 9359778 15 Tnv rov va i IOX COUV KAI TOU UAIKOU _ MOZOTIKOS EAETXOX EZONAIZSMOY av Sev kaA rrrerat Icip g _ 3 17029 De Airing block for pressure transducers complete with on off valve 150 9001 2000 Sir 4 EAETXOZ 2uugove n ue A iJoA vio Z ppaon KAT E Zuvo s ouv moTtTonoNTk rnv napayys ia av e vat kat eripQuA Esic Dx OXI E TIOLOTIKEG va N
65. are to be returned free of charge to the Company carefully packed and accompanied by a detailed failure report MAINTENANCE Rontine Inspection Nol required except for periodic inspection of the cable and connector to ensure that these are neither damaged nor softened by incompatible liquid Transinstruments OPERATING amp INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SERIES 2000 PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE INSTALLING PART NUMBER 558140 0032 ISSUE E INTRODUCTION The Series 2000 pressure transducers use molecularly bonded high output strain gauges to provide 100mV output for full range pressure when used with a 10V d c power supply Series 2000 high output pressure transducers and transmitters are fitted with a hybrid amplifier providing various optional at time of order voltage outputs and a 4 20mA current output capable of being used in control and indicating loops without further amplification CONTENTS gt im CALIBRATION GENERAL GROUNDING LOAD CHARACTERISTICS MAINTENANCE MECHANICAL INSTALLATION OPERATION RETURN FACTORY SERVICING TABLE 1 WARRANTY WETTED PARTS BRO RR ann n GENERAL Pressure range must be compatible with the maximum pressure being measured Pressure media must be compatible with the transducer transmitter wetted parts listed in these instructions Liquid must not be allowed to freeze in the pressure port The gasket must be fitted under the electrical connec
66. cards have 5 V lines equipped with a self resetting 0 75 A fuse National Instruments Corporation C 1 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Appendix Common Questions Installation and Configuration How do I set the base address for my device The base address of your device is assigned automatically through the bus protocol This assignment is completely transparent to you What jumpers should I be aware of when configuring my E Series device The E Series devices are jumperless and switchless Which National Instruments document should I read first to get started using DAQ software Your NI DAQ or application software release notes documentation is always the best starting place What version of NI DAQ must I have to use my 6023E 6024E 6025E You must have NI DAQ for PC Compatibles version 6 5 or higher to use a PCI a PXI device To use the DAQCard 6024E you must have NI DAQ for PC compatibles version 6 9 or higher Analog Input and Output I m using my device in differential analog input mode and I have connected a differential input signal but my readings are random and drift rapidly What s wrong Check your ground reference connections Your signal can be referenced to a level that is considered floating with reference to the device ground reference Even if you are in differential mode you must still reference the signal to the same ground level as the board reference There are various methods of achi
67. convert signal a circuit that counts external pulses or clock pulses timing an unwanted signal on one channel due to an input on a different channel counter the amount of current a digital or analog output channel is capable of sourcing or sinking while still operating within voltage range specifications digital to analog D A converter an electronic device often an integrated circuit that converts a digital number into a corresponding analog voltage or current analog channel 0 output signal analog channel output signal 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Glossary DAQ dB DC DGND DIFF differential amplifier differential input DIO dithering DMA DNL DO drivers driver software E EEPROM 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual data acquisition 1 collecting and measuring electrical signals from sensors transducers and test probes or fixtures and processing the measurement data using a computer 2 collecting and measuring the same kinds of electrical signals with A D and or DIO boards plugged into a computer and possibly generating control signals with D A and or DIO boards in the same computer decibel the unit for expressing a logarithmic measure of the ratio of two signal levels dB 20log10 1 2 for signals in volts direct current digital ground signal differential input configuration an amplifier with two input terminals neither of which are tied to a ground reference whose voltage di
68. diameter have cast perspex chambers above this sample size fabricated perspex chambers are re inforced with fibre glass bands 1700 For confining pressures above this figure specially strength chambers must be used However the WF10751 and WF10754 cells are designed for operating pressure of 3500 kPa ASSEMBLY The only assembly needed is to fit the following items 1 Strain arm post this is simply screwed into place 2 The base platen and where necessary the top drainage cap The base platen is fitted using three hexagonal headed screws Onthe upper side of the cell there is a centreing pimple or small projection There is an equivalent hole on the underside of the base platen the underside is the side with the O ring seals The pimple is located in the hole onthe platen and the platen is then centred equally The base of the cell is now turned over make sure that the base platen is still centred The hexagonal screws are now placed inthe three holes until each is correctly seated The screws are now tightened equally until tight TOP DRAINAGE If you wish to use top drainage the blanking screw must be removed from the top cap and be replaced by the threaded connector which should be screwed in to the top cap and gently tightened The other end which has a nut must be gently screwed into the top drainage connector on the cell base Apply alittle castor oil to the ram and gently push the ram up and d
69. enables the TRITECH 50 to be set by the operator accurately to any desired speed of operation without the need for calibration charts The forces applied to the ram are operated by a ballscrew which is driven by a stepper motor via a spur gearbox The travel limit of the ram is protected in both directions by limit switches which are internally fitted The up down rapid control buttons allows the operator a means of quickly increasing or decreasing the platen level The crosshead beam is adjustable to accept a wide range of test apparatus up to a maximum compression load of 50 KN At the rear of the TRITECH 50 an RS232 port has been provided to enable the TRITECH 50 to be controlled remotely 2 SPECIFICATIONS DIMENSIONS HEIGHT 1460mm WIDTH 503mm DEPTH 380mm HORIZONTAL CLEARANCE 364mm VERTICAL CLEARANCE MAXIMUM 1000mm VERTICAL CLEARANCE MINIMUM 335mm PLATEN DIAMETER 158mm PLATEN TRAVEL 100mm SPEED RANGE 0 0000 1 5 99999mm min n WEIGHT MAXIMUM POWER 90 Watts Note Maxium minimum vertical clearance is the measurement between the platens surface and the base of the crosshead beam 3 INSTALLATION Your TRITECH 50 machine was thoroughly inspected before shipping and is ready to operate as soon as the installation procedure has been completed Notify Wykeham Farrance or your local agent and file a claim with any carriers involved if you find any damage within 7 days of receipt Care must be taken when lifting the TRITECH 5
70. impedance balance the signal path as previously described using the same value resistor on both the positive and negative inputs be aware that there is some gain error from loading down the source 4 16 ni com Chapter 4 Signal Connections Single Ended Connection Considerations A single ended connection is one in which the device analog input signal is referenced to a ground that it can share with other input signals The input signal is tied to the positive input of the PGIA and the ground is tied to the negative input of the PGIA When every channel is configured for single ended input up to 16 analog input channels are available You can use single ended input connections for any input signal that meets the following conditions e The input signal is high level greater than 1 V e The leads connecting the signal to the device are less than 10 ft 3 m e The input signal can share a common reference point with other signals DIFF input connections are recommended for greater signal integrity for any input signal that does not meet the preceding conditions Using your software you can configure the channels for two different types of single ended connections RSE configuration and NRSE configuration The RSE configuration is used for floating signal sources in this case the device provides the reference ground point for the external signal The NRSE input configuration is used for ground referenced signal sources in th
71. kein Abschalten Strombegrenzung Verhalten bei Uberlast KurzschluB l uft weiter Derating Siehe Fig 2 Kennlinienverlauf siehe Fig 1 Parallelschaltung m glich keine gleichm ige D 81925 M nchen Germany Lastaufteilung AnschluBleitungen Tel 49 089 9278 0 Fax 49 089 9278 299 sales puls power com www puls power com Rev 01 2003 PULS Deutsch English Frangais Italiano Portugu s ML30 102 Technische Daten Technical Data Donn es Techniques Datos T cnicos Dati Tecnici Dados T cnicos Kabelende Gr Be Gewicht Breite w 45 mm H he h 75 mm Tiefe d 91 mm DIN Rail Gewicht 250g K hlung 0 3 2 5 mm AWG 28 12 0 3 4 mm AWG 28 12 6 mm empfohlen flexible Kabel starre Kabel Abisolieren am Kabelende Konvektionsk hlung Gen gend Freiraum zur K hlung lassen Bei ausreichender Konvektionsstr mung sollte der Temperatur Unterschied AT zwischen Luftein und austritt am Geh use nicht mehr als ca 15K betragen Empfohlener Freiraum an den L ftungs ffnungen mind 25 mm Normen Zulassungen Umweltdaten Das Ger t erf llt alle folgenden Normen EMV EN50081 1 und 2 St raussendung EN 55011 EN 55022 Klasse B EN61000 6 2 und EN 55024 St rfestigkeit VDE 0160 W2 Transientenfest Sicherheit EN 60950 EN 60204 1 EN 50178 IEC 60950 UL 60950 UL 508 CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 CU
72. mm per minute 0 00001 mm per minute Maximum speed 9 99999 mm per minute 9 99999 mm per minute 9 99999 mm per minute Maximum load 10 kN 50 kN 100 Minimum vertical clearance 440 mm 335 mm 390 mm Maximum vertical clearance 880 mm 1000 mm 1040 mm Horizontal clearance 278 mm 364 550 Platen diameter 158 mm 158 mm 158 mm Platen travel 70 mm 100 100 Dimensions HxWxD 1240x363x320 mm 1460x503x380 mm 1700x703x503 mm Power W 300 600 680 A stand is available for the 100 KN load frame The Tritech machines are versatile compact and easy to use bench mounted load frames They can be used for a variety of test procedures from simple uniaxial to the more sophisticated effective stress triaxial tests The Tritech 10 unit provides high quality testing capability at low loads WF 10026 with accessories WF 10076 with accessories W Wykeham Farrance 15 27 Chapter 2 The Wykeham Farrance triaxial cell WF11001 SN 100257 9 The WF10056 SN 100175 7 loading frame is companied by a WF11001 SN 100257 9 triaxial cell T he cell may house specimens up to 105mm in di ameter The cell pressure can reach up to 1700kPa The cell is made of plexiglass reinforced by a series of lateral plastic strips The main body of the cell consists of two parts The first one is the base plate of the cell which lies on the moving base plate of the frame while the second is the cell with the loading piston
73. not last the first of the authors would like to ac knowledge the European Research Training Program RTN DIGA HPRN 2002 00220 for its financial support during his nine months training pe riod 15 01 2003 31 10 2003 in Institut National Polytechnique de Greno ble as well as the financial support of Alexandros S Onasis Foundation through its three years PhD scholarship www wf ac uk http geolab mechan ntua gr 3NEOTEK Measuring and Testing Systems Athens Greece National Instruments Athens Greece Figure 2 The GeoLab WF Triaxial Apparatus Chapter 1 The Wykeham Farrance loading frame WF10056 SN 100175 7 In this chapter the WFO loading frame will be shortly presented The load ing frame WF 10056 SN 100175 7 has a maximum compressive strength of 50kN The maximum compressive strength of such an apparatus is mainly restricted by the tensile resistance of the two main columns which support the upper beam and by the step motor which applies a constant strain rate of deformation to the specimen Other specifications of the WF frame may be found in Table 1 1 The step motor allows for upwards or downwards movement of the base plane of the frame thus allowing for a constant rate of deformation The mo tor may move in a constant rate ranging from 0 00001 to 5 99999mm min A front panel allows the selection of the deformation rate via a thumbwheel Triaxial frame spec
74. of the box which has two positions Volume Change and Bypass see Figure 3 2 The other valve is situated on the righthand side of the box and has two positions Flow up and Flow down In order to bypass the automatic volume change apparatus the lefthand side valve must be in the Bypass position which will allow the water to flow directly through the triaxial cell without going through the volume change apparatus To measure the actual volume change the lefthand side valve must be set to the Volume Change position and the righthand side either to Flow up or Flow down positions If during a test the apparatus is nearing its maximum volume change 100ml the range of the apparatus can be increased by changing the flow direction using the righthand side valve 3 4 Calibration The WF17044 is easily calibrated whether using the linear strain transducer or the digital dial gauge Both devices measure from zero to full scale electrically and do not have a centre zero point Thus the user can calibrate the device from zero to 100ml in engineering units The transducer and 35 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax Operator GIO GIO Place GeoLab GeoLab Date 2004 05 25 2004 06 15 Time 11 25 13 10 Maximum spindle 25 8mm Calibration constant 0 394mm mV 0 396mm mV Linearity 99 9997 99 9997 Excitation voltage 10 00Volts 10 11 Volts Voltage Sensitivity 6 34mV V 6 45mV V Sampling rate 1 000samples sec Temp
75. radial in brass Precision movement clock in brass Sheath in brass 1 2 G Box in galvanized steel Ring in chromium plated steel Transparent in glass Pressure gauge element bimetallic spiral Shank centre back in galvanized steel W ITHO UT SHEATH Back radial connection 63 diameter also available Back radial connection 100 diameter also available BIMETALLIC THERMOMETERS DN 40 DN 63 DN 80 DN 100 BACK FMT 3 CODE DESCRIPTIO N SCALE CO N N ECT SUPPLIER CODE 200710 200720 200730 200740 200750 200760 200770 200780 200790 200810 200820 200830 200840 200850 200860 200870 TB 40 30 TB 63 50 TB 63 50 TB 63 100 TB 80 50 TB 80 50 TB 80 50 TB 80 100 TB 80 100 TB 80 100 TB 100 50 TB 100 50 TB 100 50 TB 100 100 TB 100 100 TB 100 100 0 80 C 3 86 060 C 1 2G 0 120 C 1 2G 0 120 C 1 2G 30 50 C 1 2G 060 C 1 2G 0 120 C 1 2G 30 50 C 1 2G 060 C 1 2G 0 120 C 1 2G 30 50 1 26 060 C 1 2G 0 120 C 1 2G 30 50 1 26 060 C 1 2G 0 120 C 1 2G PT1A457002 PT3A 447001 PT3A507004 PT3B507002 PT4A987001 PT4A 447001 PT4A507002 PT4B987001 PT4B447001 PT4B507002 PT5A987001 PT5A447001 PT5A507002 PT5B987001 PT5B447001 PT5B507002 DN 80 RADIAL 201110 201100 201120 201130 201140 201150 TBR 80 14 75 TBR 80 14 75 TBR 80 14 50 TBR 80 14 100 TBR 80 14 100 TBR 80 14 100 30 50 1 26 060 C 1 26 0 120 1 26
76. relative to external reference 6062 6020E 607xE 6040 30 5 LSB typical 1 0 LSB maximum 30 3 LSB typical 0 5 LSB maximum 4 LSB maximum 30 5 LSB typical 1 0 LSB maximum 30 3 LSB typical 1 0 LSB maximum 3LSB maximum 12 bits guaranteed after calibration 30 596 of output maximum not adjustable 0 to 0 67 of output maximum not adjustable Voltage Output Dutputiee plifig 5 eene DC Output 0 1 Q maximum 607xE 6040E 10 V 0 to 10 V EXT REF 0 to EXT REF 6020E software selectable 6062E 10 V EXT REF software selectable 6024E 6025E 10V Current drive 5 mA maximum Protection Short circuit to ground Power On state o oo eeseeeseeeseeees 0 V 200 mV Device Settling Time for Full Scale Step Slew Rate 607xE 3 to 0 5 LSB accuracy 20 V s 6062E 6040E 602xE 10 to 0 5 LSB accuracy 10 V us Device Reglitching Disabled Reglitching Enabled 607xE 604xE 20 mV 4 mV PCI 6024E 42 mV N A 6025E DAQCard 6024E 13 mV N A 6020E 100 mV N A 6062E 80 mV 30 mV Glitch Duration At Mid Scale Transition 607 1 5 ps 6040 6024 215 6025E 6020E 3 ps 6062 200 DC to 1 MHz Glitch energy magnitude at mid scale transition Stability Gain temperature coefficient except 6024E 6025E External reference
77. setting you can use the full resolution of the ADC to measure the input signal Table 3 2 shows the input range and precision according to the gain used Table 3 2 Measurement Precision Gain Input Range Precision 0 5 10 to 10 V 4 88 mV 1 0 5 to 45 V 2 44 mV 10 0 500 to 500 mV 244 14 u V 100 0 50 to 50 mV 24 41 uV 1 The value of 1 LSB of the 12 bit ADC that is the voltage increment corresponding to a change of one count in the ADC 12 bit count Note See Appendix A Specifications for absolute maximum ratings National Instruments Corporation 3 3 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Chapter 3 Hardware Overview Dithering 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual When you enable dithering you add approximately 0 5 LSB ms of white Gaussian noise to the signal to be converted by the ADC This addition is useful for applications involving averaging to increase the resolution of your device as in calibration or spectral analysis In such applications noise modulation is decreased and differential linearity is improved by the addition of dithering When taking DC measurements such as when checking the device calibration enable dithering and average about 1 000 points to take a single reading This process removes the effects of quantization and reduces measurement noise resulting in improved resolution For high speed applications not involving averaging or spectral analysis you may want to disab
78. the transducer consists of a shielded four cable wire which ends to a 5 pin socket plug 240 The wiring connection of the load cell follows the below mentioned cabling excitation voltage red excitation voltage blue output voltage 4 green output voltage yellow and ground shield In the following more information and technical specifications concern ing the STALC3 50kN 24937 submersible load cell are given through the WF technical references and manuals 29 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax STALC3 50kN 24937 1 T Submersible load cell 1 Figure 2 28 Wykeham Farrance STALC3 50kN triaxial submersible load cell Calibration of Load Cell STALC3 50kN GeoLab GIO amp CHM 29 October 2004 PCI 6024E 60 0 a e o 2 373x 0 659 1 000 BR 5 o Compressive Load kN 8 8 10 0 0 0 0 0 2 5 5 0 7 5 10 0 12 5 15 0 17 5 20 0 22 5 Voltage mV Figure 2 29 STALC3 50kN 24937 submersible load cell calibration 2004 10 29 30 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax W Wykeham Farrance international Weston Road Slough SLI 4HW England Tel 44 0 1753 571241 Fax 44 0 1753 811313 CALIBRATION CERTIFICATE Telex 847301 WFENG G E Mail 101333 1232 compuserve com Calibration of transducer Date 5 August 2004 Calibration Results Transducer Type STALC3 50kN Serial No 24937 Load Rating Proof Rating 75kN Zero Output 0 052mV 10
79. the WF Triaxial Frame are given The Handbook of WF GeoTriax Figure 1 2 Wykeham Farrance 50kN triaxial frame photo The Handbook of WF GeoTriax Figure 1 3 Wykeham Farrance 50kN triaxial frame front panel photo Figure 1 4 Wykeham Farrance 50KN triaxial frame rear view photo In Figure 1 6 the stepper motor of the loading frame is tested and cal ibrated against constant rate of the displacement of the base plate The LSC HS50 9021 and LSC HS25 9016 displacement transducer are used to measure the displacement of the base plate of the loading frame The Handbook of WF GeoTriax 0 08 0709 0124 AF xx 8 L 6 un 027 o 9 E z E 8 wy o TT o oak 8205 L6 lt ogs woe ETA ard 09 14 19 0 a 65 0 E 159 0 I 36 0 380 0
80. to Appendix A Specifications for a complete listing of settling times for each of the devices When scanning among channels at various gains the settling times can increase When the PGIA switches to a higher gain the signal on the previous channel can be well outside the new smaller range For instance suppose a 4 V signal connects to channel 0 and a 1 mV signal connects to channel 1 and suppose the is programmed to apply a gain of one to channel 0 and a gain of 100 to channel 1 When the multiplexer switches to channel 1 and the switches to a gain of 100 the new full scale range is 50 mV National Instruments Corporation 3 5 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Chapter 3 Hardware Overview The approximately 4 V step from 4 V to 1 mV is 4 000 of the new full scale range It can take as long as 100 us for the circuitry to settle to 1 LSB after such a large transition In general this extra settling time is not needed when the PGIA is switching to a lower gain Settling times can also increase when scanning high impedance signals due to a phenomenon called charge injection where the analog input multiplexer injects a small amount of charge into each signal source when that source is selected If the impedance of the source is not low enough the effect of the charge a voltage error has not decayed by the time the ADC samples the signal For this reason keep source impedances under 1 kQ to perform high speed scan
81. ut 1 000 ELS 200 a 2 15 0 4 o vert m 0 amp 1004 M gt 20577 5 0 ee E d 0 0 42 0 0 10 0 20 0 30 0 40 0 50 0 60 0 Voltage mV 70 0 Figure 3 5 Wykeham Farrance volume change apparatus displacement transducer calibration 2004 06 15 LSC HS25 9016 38 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax Er LSC HS25 9016 Displacement transducer L Figure 3 6 Wykeham Farrance volume change apparatus displacement transducer LSC HS25 9016 Figure 3 7 Wykeham Farrance volume change apparatus WF17044 SN 107584 7 39 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax 40 Wykeham Farrance nternatioona Serial No Wykeham Farrance International Limited Telephone 01753 571241 Weston Road Telefax 01753 811313 Trading Estate Telex 847301 WFENG G Slough Email 101333 1232 compuserve com Berks SL1 4HW England Automatic Volume Change Contents Wykeham Farrance Automatic Volume Change WE INTRODUCTION The WF17043 and WF17044 automatic volume change apparatus from Wykeham Farrance allows m methods of measuring diaphragm displacement The WF17044 is the most popular version this is described first The WF17043 utilises an external measuring
82. 0 It should be positioned on a suitable rigid bench which can be supplied by us WF 10079 or other flat surface capable of withstanding the total weight of the machine including the weight of the sample The machine is supplied with adjustable feet to compensate for any uneveness of the bench surface To ensure a long and trouble free life for your machine it is important that it is kept clean and that the louvres in the base and rear of the machine are kept clear of obstructions to allow a constant air flow through the machine Before powering up your TRITECH 50 check that the voltage selector is set so that it is compatible with your local supply voltage This is done by lining up the arrows on the voltage selector filter Once this has been done the integral power cable which is supplied with the unit may be connected to the TRITECH 50 The machine may then be operated through a standard 13 amp socket using a suitable three pin plug with a fuse rating of 3 amps Colour Function Green Yellow Earth Ground Blue Neutral Brown EC It is essential that the plug fitted to the machine is wired correctly 4 CONTROLS DESCRIPTION 41 MAINS The power on off switch is located at the rear of the TRITECH 50 When it is switched ON the STOP Lamp is illuminated ie ON 1 OFF O 4 2 SPEED SELECTOR SWITCH The thumbwheel Speed Selector switch displays digitally the platen travel in mm min This be altered between
83. 0 102 Donn es T L hninunc echniques Sortie Input Voltage Vin Nominal 100 240 V AC Frequency 47 63 Hz AC continuously 85 264 V AC DC continuously 859 375 V DC Input Current lj Nominal 0 6 A 8100 V ACin 0 25 A 240 V ACin nrush current 17 5A 0 3A s 120Vin lp Pt 36A 1 2A s 240Vin typ Tamb 50 C cold start mains acc EN 61000 3 3 Power factor PFC Unit fulfills EN 61000 3 2 External Fusing for unit protection not necessary internal fuse observe national regulations Connector cables flexible cable 0 3 2 5 mm awG 28 12 solid cable 0 3 4 mm AWG 28 12 stripping cable end 6 mm recommended Size Weight Width w 45 mm Height h 75 mm Depth 91 DIN Rail Weight 2509 Cooling Convection Cooling Leave sufficient space around the unit for cooling a sufficient convection air stream the temperature difference AT between entering and exiting air at the housing surface should not exceed approx 15K Recommended free space at all sides with ventilation holes 25 mm each Standards Certifications The unit fulfills all following standards EMC EN50081 1 and 2 Emissions EN 55011 EN 55022 Class B EN61000 6 2 and EN 55024 Immunity 0160 W2 Transient protect Safety EN 60950 EN 60204 1 EN 50178 IEC60950 UL 60950 UL 508 CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 CUR CAN CSA C22 2 No 14 CUL CE Mark
84. 0 kHz 30 0196 Base clock accuracy Maximum source frequency Up down counter timers 20 Minimum source pulse duration Minimum gate pulse duration Data transfers 10 ns edge detect mode 10 ns edge detect mode interrupts programmed 1 0 Except DAQCard and USB DAOPad Triggers Analog Triggers Number of Triggers 607xE 1 6062 6040 602 None Purpose AT ALO IAE Start and stop trigger gate clock Analog output Start trigger gate clock General purpose counter timers Source gate All analog input channels PFI 0 Al START TRIG Level Internal source Al lt 0 15 63 gt External source 0 Al START TRIG Slope Resolution Bandwidth 3 dB full scale 10V Positive or negative software selectable 8 bits 1 in 256 Device Internal Source External Source 607 2 MHz 7 MHz 6062 500 kHz 2 5 MHz 6040 650 kHz 3 MHz Programmable Digital Triggers All Devices Purpose Analog ec eee Start and stop trigger gate clock Analog output Start trigger gate clock General purpose counter timers Source gate Source 0 9 lt 0 6 gt Compatibility 5 V TIL Response Rising or falling edge Pulse width 10 ns minimum External Input For Digital Or Analog Trigger PFIO TRIG1 Impedance Coupli Protection Digital tti
85. 00 800 600 400 4 200 ev y 10 008x 5 689 1 000 9 712 13 440 0 997 Eide s 60 0 80 0 100 0 120 0 140 0 200 Voltage mV Figure 2 13 2200AGB1001A2UA003 Cell Pressure Port3 Calibration 2004 11 23 Figure 2 14 Pore pressure line Port4 17 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax Pressure kPa 1 400 Calibration of Pressure Transducer T 023096 Port 04 GeoLab GlO 05 July 2004 PCI 6024E 1 200 1 000 800 600 y 9 960x 3 679 R 1 000 y 9 917 4 769 R 0 992 20 0 40 0 60 0 80 0 100 0 120 0 140 0 Voltage mV Figure 2 15 RS Type 249 T023096 Pore Pressure Port4 Calibration 2004 07 05 Calibration of Pressure Transducer T 023096 Port 04 GeoLab GIO 8 NITHE 23 November 2004 PCI 6024E 4 400 1 200 4 e T 1 000 SU i 800 uet p 5 600 4 sec o d y 10 003 4 180 400 Y 9 753x 11 237 sae 1 000 R 0 997 gi 200 eet 20 0 P 200 400 60 0 80 0 1000 1200 140 0 200 Voltage mV Figure 2 16 RS Type 249 T023096 Pore Pressure Port4 Calibration 2004 11 23 18 Serial No NF WYKEHAM FARRANCE ENGINEERING LIMITED Telephone 01753 571241 Weston Road Telefax 01753 811313 Trading Estate Telex 347301 WFENG G Slough Berks SL1 4HW England WF17021 WF17022 WF17060 Pressure Transducers V Con
86. 00 mV 0 8 0 9 6062 10 20 V 0 25 0 6 500 mV 0 4 0 75 200 mV 0 5 0 8 100 mV 0 8 1 0 6040E 1 to 20V 0 2 0 5 500 mV 0 25 0 5 200 mV 0 5 0 7 100 mV 0 9 1 0 6023E 1 to 20 V 0 1 0 6 PCI 6024E 6025E 100 mV 0 7 0 8 DAQCard 6024E 10 to 20 V 0 1 0 65 1V 0 45 0 65 100 mV 0 70 0 90 6020E 1to20V 0 07 0 5 500 mV 0 12 0 5 200 mV 0 25 0 6 100 mV 0 5 0 7 Crosstalk DC to 100 KHz Device Adjacent Channels All Other Channels 607xE 6062E 6040E 15 dB 90 dB 602xE 60 dB 80 dB National Instruments Tel 800 433 3488 info ni com ni com 6 12 Bit E Series Multifunction Specifications Specifications NI 607xE NI 606xE NI 6040E NI 602xE continued Analog Output Output Characteristics Number of Channels 607xE 2 voltage outputs 6062 6040 6020 6024 6025 6023 None R solution eet deerit 12 bits 1 in 4 096 Maximum update rate Waveform Generation External Reference Input Overvoltage protection 607xE 6062E 6040E 325 V powered on 15 V powered off 35 V powered on 25 V powered off Input 10 Bandwidth 3 dB 607xE 6040E 1MHz 50 kHz 60206 ia 300 kHz Dynamic Characteristics FIFO Mode Non FIFO Mode Internally Externally Device Timed Timed 1 Channel 2 Channels 607xE 1 MS s 950 kS s 800 kS s 400 kS s
87. 1 MHz 6062 1 3 MHz 250 6040 600 kHz 350 kHz 6023E 500 kHz 225 kHz PCI 6024E 6025E DAQCard 6024E 500 kHz 265 kHz DAQPad 6020E 150 kHz 200 kHz Settling Time to Full Scale Step Accuracy 0 012 0 024 0 098 Device Range 0 5 LSB 1 LSB 4 LSB 6070E 20V 2 ys typica 5 ys typica 1 5 ys typical 3 ys maximum 2 ys maximum 2 us maximum 10V 2 ys typica 5 ys typica 1 3 ys typica 3 ps maximum 2 ys maximum 1 5 us maximum 200 mV to 5 V 2 ys typica 5 ys typica 0 9 us typical 3 us maximum 2 15 maximum 1 us maximum 100 mV 2 ys typica 5 ys typica 1 us typical 3 maximum 2 maximum 1 5 is maximum 6071E 20V 3 ys typica 9 ys typica 1 9 ys typica 5 us max 2 5 us maximum 2 Jis maximum 10V 3 ys typica 9 ys typica 1 2 ys typical 5 ps maximum 2 5 us maximum 1 5 us maximum 200 mV to 5 V 3 ys typica 9 ys typica 1 2 ys typical 5 maximum 2 5 us maximum 1 3 us maximum 100 mV 3 ys typica 9 ys typica 12 ys typica 5 maximum 25 us maximum 1 5 us maximum 6062E All 2 5 ys typical 2 5 ys typica 2 ys typical 4 maximum 3 maximum 2 5 us maximum All 4 us typica 4 maximum 4 us maximum 8 maximum All 5 us typica 5 is maximum 5 Jis maximum All 10 uis maximum 10 maximum 10 us maximum System Noise LSB ms Not Including Quantization Device Range Dither Off Dither 6070E 1to20V 0 25 0 5 6071E 500 mV 04 0 6 200 mV 0 5 0 7 1
88. 10 74 cm 4 92 by 4 23 in og 2 5 CB 68LP and CB 68LPR 1 0 Connector Blocks See Figure 6 gt Low cost termination accessories with 68 screw terminals for easy connection of field SE T O signals to the counter timer devices The connector blocks include standoffs for use on a desktop or mounting in a custom panel The CB 68LP has a vertically mounted 68 pin connector The CB 68LPR has right angle mounted connector for Figure 5 TBX 68 Connector Block 5 use with with the CA 1000 GB a6 SU ue RR TERE 777145 01 Dimensions 14 35 by 10 74 cm 5 65 by 4 23 in CB GSLPR ie ERES elec S 777145 02 Dimensions 7 62 by 16 19 cm 3 00 by 6 36 in Figure 6 CB 68LP and CB 68LPR 1 0 Connector Blocks National Instruments Tel 800 433 3488 Fax 512 683 9300 info ni com ni com 391 Counter Timer Accessories and Cables 5 E o lt S ea Signal Conditioning Counter Timer Accessories and Cables Figure 7 RTSI Bus Cable Figure amp Extended RTSI Bus Cable Figure 9 SH68 68 D1 Shielded Cable Figure 10 R6868 Ribbon 1 0 Cable 2 4 b S Figure 11 68 Pin Custom Cable Kit Cables RTSI Bus Cables See Figures 7 and 8 Use RTSI bus cables to connect timing and synchronization signals among measurement vision motion and CAN boards for PCI For systems using long and short boards order the extended RTSI cable
89. 14 64 GND 15 65 PCO 16 66 GND 17 67 PB7 18 68 GND 19 69 PB6 20 70 GND 21 71 PB5 22 72 GND 23 73 4 24 74 GND 25 75 26 76 GND 27 77 PB2 28 78 GND 29 79 PB1 30 80 GND 31 81 PBO 32 82 GND 33 83 7 34 84 GND 35 85 36 86 37 87 PA5 38 88 GND 39 89 PA4 40 90 GND 41 91 42 92 43 9 2 44 94 GND 45 95 PA1 46 96 GND 47 97 PAO 48 98 GND 49 99 5V 50 100 National Instruments Corporation Figure 4 2 1 0 Connector Pin Assignment for the 6025E 4 8 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Chapter 4 Signal Connections Table 4 2 shows the I O connector signal descriptions for the 6023E 6024E and 6025E Table 4 2 1 0 Connector Signal Descriptions Signal Name Reference Direction Description AIGND Analog input ground these pins are the reference point for single ended measurements in RSE configuration and the bias current return point for DIFF measurements All three ground references AIGND AOGND and DGND are connected on your device lt 0 15 gt AIGND Input Analog input channels 0 through 15 you can configure each channel pair ACH lt i i 8 gt i 0 7 as either one DIFF input or two single ended inputs AISENSE AIGND Input Analog input sense this pin serves as the reference node for any of channels ACH lt 0 15 gt in NRSE conf
90. 200 CVD Pressure Transducer 2 Output 3 Pressure Datum 5 F F EM Electrical Connection 4 6 7 Apparatus Protection 8 Cable Length gt Performance Accuracy Thermal Stock Option Part numbers built using all stock options can be shipped next day T Selection Required View the dimension chart for help in ordering Create Part Number View the dimension chart for help in ordering Gems Sensors OPERATING amp INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS RS TYPE 249 GAUGE SENSORS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE INSTALLING Part Number 560550 0066 Issue IMPORTANT NOTE AJI GIMS Pressure and Level amp Flow Products arc designed and manufactured in accordance with Sound Engineering Practice as defined by the Pressure Equipment Directive 97 23 Pressure transducer products designed to meet the highest risk category IV of the Pressure Equipment Directive are clearly marked on the labcl by CE0086 Compliance is achieved through modules B D No other products should be used as Safety Accessories as defined by the PED Article Paragraph 2 1 3 ies INTRODUCTION Series Type 249 Gauge Transducers and Transmitters with the CE Mark conform with the essential protection requirements of the EMC Directive 89 33 EEC amended by certified type testing to EN 50082 2 and EN 50081 1 ELECT
91. 23E 6024E 6025E User Manual Specifications This appendix individually lists the specifications of each bus type and are typical at 25 C PCI and PXI Buses Analog Input Input Characteristics Number of channels 16 single ended or 8 differential software selectable per channel Type o ADC aoc fetten ritis Successive approximation Resolution 12 bits 1 in 4 096 Sampling 200 kS s guaranteed Input signal Bipolar only Board Gain Software Selectable Range 0 5 10 V 1 5 10 500 mV 100 50 mV Input DC Max working voltage signal common mode National Instruments Corporation A 1 Each input should remain within 11 V of ground 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Appendix Specifications for PCI and PXI Buses Overvoltage protection Signal Powered On Powered Off lt 0 15 gt 42 35 AISENSE 40 25 FIFO buffer size 4 5125 Data transfers ete Hee DMA interrupts programmed I O DMA modes per IRR Scatter gather single transfer demand transfer Configuration memory size 512 words Accuracy Information Absolute Accuracy Relative Accuracy Noise Quantization Absolute Nominal Range V 7o of Readin
92. 24 10V 5V 6025 1V 500 mV 100 mV 50 mV Input coupling DC Maximum working voltage signal common Input should remain within 11 V of ground 607 30 5 LSB 1 5 LSB 6062 6040 6023 6024 6025 6020 0 215 x1 5 LSB DNL Device Typical Maximum 607xE 30 5 LSB 1 0 LSB 6040E 6023E PCI 6024E 6025E 6020E 0 2 LSB 1 0 LSB 6062E 0 75 LSB 0 9 1 5 LSB DAQCard 6024E No missing 12 bits guaranteed National Instruments Tel 800 433 3488 info ni com ni com 5 12 Bit E Series Multifunction DAQ Specifications Specifications NI 607xE NI 606xE NI 6040E NI 602xE continued Amplifier Characteristics Input Impedance Device Normal Powered On Powered Off Overload 6070E 100 GQ in parallel 8200 8200 6062 with 100 pF 6040E PCI 6071E 6071 6023 6024E 100 GQ in parallel with 100 pF 6025 6020 100 GQ in parallel with 50 pF 3kQ Input bias current 200 pA Input offset current 100 pA CMRR DC to 60 Hz Device Range CMRR dB 607xE 20V 95 10V 100 100 mV to 5 V 106 6040E 10 to 20 V 85 6062E 5V 95 100 mV to 2 V 100 6023E 10 to 20 V 85 6024E 100 mV to 1 V 90 6025E 6020E 100 mV to 20 V 90 Dynamic Characteristics Bandwidth Device Small Signal 3 dB Large Signal 1 THD 607xE 1 6 MHz
93. 27 Al 5 AI3GND 29 63 3 AIGND 32 66 alg 9 59 20 9 59 33 Alio 31 85 A2 10 60 Al 0 60 GND wc EES o AZ T 60 P32 NC 27 61 NC All2 12 62 A29 12 62 GND NC 26 60 NC AIGND 29 All 13 63 22 13 63 P31 Ne Nc EHE NS Pao 25 59 61 AGND AL 16 66 6 6 26 60 5 A7 17 67 32 P27 NC 23 5 NC ACHG 25 59 15 18 68 15 18 68 GND A00 NC 58 AISENSE 19 69 A33 AISENSE 19 69 P26 28 AGND AM A00 2 70 A00 20 70 GND A00 21 55 AOGND AcHi5 23 57 7 A01 21 71 A01 21 71 P25 000 Zo mo 1953 DGND 8 9 A0 GND DGND 24 DGND 2 74 GND DGND 18 52 POO EXTREF 20 GND 258 75 2 210 25 75 23 19 53 Po4 258 76 4 26 17 51 POS penn poo 27 A36 11 27 77 P22 PoS 16 50 DGND j 28 178 5 28 78 BID 17 P0 5 P02 29 79 A3 P2 29 19 P21 15 49 pos 16 50 penp 06 30 80 A45 P16 30 80 GND 5V 14 48 POT DGND 15 49 31 81 8 Pis BERN NG P20 DiBND P07 3 82 PI 3 8 GND 13 47 45V 14 DGND 33 83 A3 DGND 33 8 12 46 AIHOLD DGND 13 47 4 84 7 34 8 GND DGND 12 46 45V 35 85 8 45V 35 85 11 45 EXTSTROBE A
94. 34 to 4 35 TRIG2 signal 4 35 to 4 36 typical posttriggered acquisition figure 4 32 typical pretriggered acquisition figure 4 33 DAQCard 6024E block diagram 3 2 DAQ STC 1 DATA signal description table 4 26 mode input timing figure 4 27 mode output timing figure 4 28 mode 2 bidirectional timing figure 4 29 device and RTSI clocks 3 9 DGND signal description table 4 4 digital I O signal connections 4 20 to 4 21 signal summary table 4 7 DIFF mode description table 3 3 recommended configuration figure 4 12 National Instruments Corporation Index differential connections 4 13 to 4 16 ground referenced signal sources 4 14 nonreferenced or floating signal sources 4 15 to 4 16 when to use 4 13 digital I O See also PPI Programmable Peripheral Interface common questions C 3 to C 5 overview 3 7 signal connections 4 20 to 4 22 block diagram of digital I O connections figure 4 22 digital I O connections figure 4 21 digital I O specifications PCI and PXI buses A 7 to A 8 DIO lt 0 7 gt 7 lt 0 7 gt lt 0 7 gt lt 0 7 gt A 7 PCMCIA bus 16 DIO lt 0 7 gt A 16 digital trigger specifications A 9 DIO power up state changing to pulled low 4 24 to 4 25 DIO lt 0 7 gt signal description table 4 4 digital I O signal connections 4 20 to 4 21 digital I O specifications A 7 signal summary table 4 7 dithering 3 4 to 3 5 documentation
95. 37 5 5 0 0272 0 0314 442 1 95 0 521 0 0005 6 517 2 95 0 686 0 5 0 5 0 0872 0 0914 0 462 0 452 0 052 0 0010 0 972 0 516 0 069 0 05 0 05 0 0872 0 0914 0 066 0 063 0 007 0 0010 0 119 0 073 0 009 Note Accuracies are valid for measurements following an internal Series calibration Averaged numbers assume dithering and averaging of 100 single channel readings Measurement accuracies are listed for operational temperatures within 1 C of internal calibration temperature and 10 C of external or factory calibration temperature Transfer Characteristics Relative 0 5 LSB typ dithered 1 5 LSB max undithered Ibm 0 75 LSB typ 0 9 to 1 5 LSB max No missing 4 12 bits guaranteed Offset error Pregain error after calibration 12 uV max Pregain error before calibration 28 mV max Postgain error after calibration 0 5 mV max Postgain error before calibration 100 mV max Gain error relative to calibration reference After calibration gain 1 0 02 of reading max Before calibration 2 75 of reading max Gain with gain error adjusted to 0 at gain 1 0 05 of reading max 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual A 12 ni com Appendix Specifications for Bus Amplifier Characteristics Input impedance Normal powered on
96. 4 47 GPCTR1_SOURCE signal 4 46 GPCTR1_UP_DOWN signal 4 47 to 4 49 overview 4 30 programmable function input connections 4 31 to 4 32 timing I O connections figure 4 31 waveform generation timing connections 4 40 to 4 43 UISOURCE signal 4 42 to 4 43 UPDATE signal 4 41 to 4 42 WFTRIG signal 4 40 to 4 41 timing I O common questions C 3 to C 5 specifications PCI and PXI buses A 8 PCMCIA bus A 16 to A 17 timing signal routing 3 7 to 3 11 CONVERT signal routing figure 3 8 device and RTSI clocks 3 9 programmable function inputs 3 8 to 3 9 RTSI triggers 3 9 to 3 11 timing specifications 4 25 to 4 29 mode 1 input timing figure 4 27 mode 1 output timing figure 4 28 mode 2 bidirectional timing figure 4 29 signal names used in diagrams table 4 25 to 4 26 TRIGI signal 4 34 to 4 35 TRIG2 signal 4 35 to 4 36 trigger specifications PCI and PXI buses digital trigger 9 RTSI trigger A 9 PCMCIA bus A 17 digital trigger A 17 triggers RTSI See RTSI trigger lines 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Index U UISOURCE signal 4 42 to 4 43 unpacking 6023E 6024E 6025E 2 1 UPDATE signal 4 41 to 4 42 VCC signal table 4 7 VirtualBench software 1 4 voltage output specifications PCI and PXI buses A 6 PCMCIA bus A 15 W waveform generation questions about C 2 to C 3 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual 1 10 waveform generation timing connections 4 40 to 4 43 UISOURCE signal 4 42 t
97. 5 as follows e If you are using NI DAQ call Select Signal deviceNumber ND IN CONVERT ND PFI 5 ND HIGH TO LOW e If you are using LabVIEW invoke AI Clock Config VI with clock source code set to PFI pin high to low and clock source string set to 5 3 Initiate analog input data acquisition which starts only when the analog output waveform generation starts 4 Initiate analog output waveform generation Timing and Digital 1 0 What types of triggering can be hardware implemented on my device Digital triggering is hardware supported on every device Will the counter timer applications that I wrote previously work with the DAQ STC If you are using NI DAQ with LabVIEW some of your applications drawn using the CTR VIs will still run However there are many differences in the counters between the E Series and other devices the counter numbers are different timebase selections are different and the DAQ STC counters are National Instruments Corporation C 3 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Common Questions 24 bit counters unlike the 16 bit counters on devices without the DAQ STC If you are using the NI DAQ language interface or LabWindows CVI the answer is no the counter timer applications that you wrote previously will not work with the DAQ STC You must use the GPCTR functions ICTR and CTR functions will not work with the DAQ STC The GPCTR functions have the same capabilities as the IC
98. 51 Unshielded Screw terminals 1 R6868 TBX 68 CB 68LP CB 68LPR DAQ signal accessory Unshielded 50 pin connector R6850 50 custom or 3rd party PXI only Shielded Front mounted screw terminals N A 2705 PCMCIA Shielded Screw terminals SHC68 68 EP SHC68U 68 EP 2 SCB 68 CA 1000 Shielded 50 pin connector SHC68 68 EP or SHC68U 68 EP 2 68 50 CB50 custom or 3rd party Unshielded Screw terminals 1 RC68 68 TBX 68 CB 68LP CB 68LPR DAQ signal accessory Unshielded 50 pin connector RC68 68 68 50 CB50 custom or 3rd party Unshielded cables can connect to shielded accessories and vice versa In adjacent PCMCIA slots both cables types are required because the same cable would cause mechanical hindrance Table 1 Cable Connection Specifications for 16 Channel Series Devices and Basic Multifunction DAQ except NI 6025E which is on the next page National Instruments Tel 800 433 3488 info ni com ni com 11 Multifunction Cable and Accessory Selection Guides AIGND 1 5 AIGND 1 51 P37 AlO 34 68 0 AIGND 2 52 2 AIGND 2 52 GND 33 67 AIOGND connects for boards that do not support AO AM an E Al1 GND 32 66 All or use an external reference with the SH1006868 cable A1 5 55 18 A1 5 55 P35 AI2 31 65 AI2 34 88 9 6 5 26 6 56 GND A2 7 5 2 7 5 P34 Al3 30 64 AI2 GND 3 87 All 58
99. 600 ohms FIGURE 1 POWER SUPPLY RESISTIVE LOAD TRANSMITTER 12 36V d c 558140 0032 ISSUE E PAGE 2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR 4 POLE MINIATURE Millivoit TABLE 1 OUTPUT Pin 1 Supply ve Supply ve Pin2 Output ve Common ve ve Pin 3 Output ve Output ve Pin 4 Supply ve Case Earth Case Earth CABLE Red Supply ve Supply ve White Output Blue Output ve Yellow Output ve Black Common Green Supply ve ELECTRICAL Rated Min Max DIMENSIONS PRESSURE CONNECTION G 1 4 AT EXTERNAL THREAD TO BS2779 958140 0032 STANDARD CABLE LENGTH 1 METRE ISSUE E PAGE 3 WARRANTY We guarantee this instrument against faulty workmanship and materials for a period of one year from date of delivery The Company undertake to repair free of charge ex works any instrument found to be defective within the specified period providing the instrument has been used within the specification in accordance with these instructions and has not been misused in any way Detailed notice of such defects and satisfactory proof thereof must be given to the Company immediately after the discovery and the goods are to be retumed free of charge to the Company carefully packed and accompanied by a detailed failure report See RETURN TO FACTORY WETTED PARTS 17 4 PH stainless steel plus Nickle Braze to BS1845 SERVICING
100. 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Chapter 4 Signal Connections Figures 4 23 and 4 24 show the input and output timing requirements for the TRIG2 signal Rising Edge Polarity Falling Edge Polarity ty 10 ns minimum 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Figure 4 23 TRIG2 Input Signal Timing ty 50 100 ns Figure 4 24 TRIG2 Output Signal Timing STARTSCAN Signal Any PFI pin can externally input the STARTSCAN signal which is available as an output on the PFI7 STARTSCAN pin Refer to Figures 4 17 and 4 18 for the relationship of STARTSCAN to the DAQ sequence As an input the STARTSCAN signal is configured in the edge detection mode You can select any PFI pin as the source for STARTSCAN and configure the polarity selection for either rising or falling edge The selected edge of the STARTSCAN signal initiates a scan The sample interval counter starts if you select internally triggered CONVERT As an output the STARTSCAN signal reflects the actual start pulse that initiates a scan This is true even if the starts are externally triggered by another PFI You have two output options The first is an active high pulse with a pulse width of 50 to 100 ns which indicates the start of the scan The second action is an active high pulse that terminates at the start of the last conversion in the scan which indicates a scan in progress STARTSCAN is 4 36 ni com Chapter 4 Signal Connections
101. 6025E User Manual 4 46 ni com Chapter 4 Signal Connections As an output the GPCTR1_GATE signal monitors the actual gate signal connected to general purpose counter This is true even if the gate is externally generated by another PFI This output is set to high impedance at startup Figure 4 39 shows the timing requirements for the GPCTR1_GATE signal Rising Edge Polarity Falling Edge Polarity ty 10 ns minimum Figure 4 39 GPCTR1_GATE Signal Timing in Edge Detection Mode GPCTR1_OUT Signal This signal is available only as an output on the GPCTR1_OUT pin The GPCTR1_OUT signal monitors the TC device general purpose counter 1 You have two software selectable output options pulse on TC and toggle output polarity on TC The output polarity is software selectable for both options This output is set to high impedance at startup Figure 4 40 shows the timing requirements for the GPCTR1_OUT signal GPCTR1_SOURCE GPCTR1_OUT Pulse on TC GPCTR1_OUT Toggle Output on TC Figure 4 40 GPCTR1_OUT Signal Timing GPCTR1_UP_DOWN Signal This signal can be externally input on the DIO7 pin and is not available as an output the I O connector General purpose counter 1 counts down when this pin is at a logic low and counts up at a logic high This input can be disabled so that software can control the up down functionality an
102. 6040E system dependent system dependent 6062E 850 kS s 850 kS s 800 kS s 400 kS s system dependent system dependent 6023E N A N A 10 kS s with DMA 10 kS s with DMA PCI 6024E 1 kS s with interrupts 1 kS s with interrupts 6025E system dependent system dependent DAQCard 6024E N A N A 1 kS s with interrupts 1 kS s with interrupts system dependent system dependent DAQPad 6020E N A N A 20 S s 20 S s system dependent system dependent FIFO Buffer Size 607xE 6062E 2 048 samples 6040E 512 samples 602xE None Data transfers PCI PXI DAQPad for IEEE 1394 DMA interrupts programmed 1 0 DAQCard DAQPad for USB Interrupts programmed 1 0 DMA mades PCI PX DAQPad nn Scatter gather single transfer demand transfer Transfer Characteristics Relative accuracy After calibration 6062 DAQCard 6024E All others Before calibration DNL After calibration 6062E DAQCard 6024E All oti Before ca Monotonicity Gain error relative to external reference 6062E 6020E 607xE 6040E 30 5 LSB typical 1 0 LSB maximum 30 3 LSB typical 0 5 LSB maximum 4 LSB maximum 30 5 LSB typical 1 0 LSB maximum 30 3 LSB typical 1 0 LSB maximum 3LSB maximum 12 bits guaranteed after calibration 30 596 of output maximum not adjustable 0 to 0 67 of output maximum not adjustable Voltage Output Dutputiee plifig 5 eene DC Output
103. 8 981 9121 e mail internet www appmeas co uk Green output Yellow ve output Applied Measurements Limited hereby certifies that the above items have been inspected tested and calibrated in all respects with the requirements of the customer s order Director PETER LEWIS Reg No 2583968 CALIBRATION CERTIFICATE Calibration of Transducer with instrumentation Customer Neotek OEP Xystris amp Co Venizelou 105 N Smyrni 171 22 Athens Greece Transducer Type Instrumentation Type Supply Voltage Instrumentation calibration engineering units Date 27 August 2004 Customer Order Ref 24112 AML Order Ref 120704D DBBSE 5T Serial Number A2288 Tracker 211 E B 1 R Serial Number 07040077 240Vac 50Hz kiloNewtons kN Number of Decimal Places Two Options Fitted Dual trip Calibration carried out by DRC Calibration Results Connections Load applied in compression Calibration traceable to National Standards Traceable standard last calibrated August 2002 Load applied in Compression Load Applied Display Reading kN kN _ APPLIED MEASUREMENTS LIMITED 3 MERCURY HOUSE CALLEVA PARK ALDERMASTON BERKSHIRE RG7 8PN UK Tel 444 0118 981 7339 Fax 44 0118 98 9121 e mail info appmeas co uk Intemet www appmeas co uk DBBSE Cable Tracker input Terminal Red Exc 7 Blue ve E
104. 8 ni com Chapter 3 Hardware Overview scheme reduces the need to change physical connections to the I O connector for different applications You can also individually enable each of the PFI pins to output a specific internal timing signal For example if you need UPDATE signal as an output on the I O connector software can turn on the output driver for the PFI5 UPDATE pin Device and Clocks PCI and PXI buses Many device functions require a frequency timebase to generate the necessary timing signals for controlling A D conversions DAC updates or general purpose signals at the I O connector These devices use either its internal 20 MHz timebase or a timebase received over the RTSI bus In addition if you configure the device to use the internal timebase you can also program the device to drive its internal timebase over the RTSI bus to another device that is programmed to receive this timebase signal This clock source whether local or from the RTSI bus is used directly by the device as the primary frequency source The default configuration at startup is to use the internal timebase without driving the RTSI bus timebase signal This timebase is software selectable PXI 6025E The RTSI clock connects to other devices through the PXI trigger bus on the PXI backplane The RTSI clock signal uses the PXI trigger lt 7 gt line for this connection RTSI Triggers PCI and PXI buses The seven RTSI tr
105. 9 physical specifications PCI and PXI buses A 9 to A 10 PCMCIA bus A 18 pin assignments 6023E 6024E figure 4 2 6025E figure 4 3 Port C pin assignments description 4 23 signal assignments table 4 23 posttriggered acquisition figure 4 32 power connections 4 30 power requirement specifications PCI and PXI buses A 9 PCMCIA bus A 17 ni com power up state digital I O 4 24 to 4 25 PPI Programmable Peripheral Interface 6025E only 4 22 to 4 23 changing DIO power up state to pulled low 4 24 to 4 25 digital I O connections block diagram figure 4 22 mode input timing figure 4 27 mode 1 output timing figure 4 28 mode 2 bidirectional timing figure 4 29 Port C pin assignments 4 23 power up state 4 24 to 4 25 signal names used in diagrams table 4 25 to 4 26 timing specifications 4 25 to 4 29 pretriggered acquisition figure 4 33 programmable function inputs PFIs See programmable function inputs programmable gain instrumentation amplifier See PGIA programmable gain instrumentation amplifier Programmable Peripheral Interface PPI See PPI Programmable Peripheral Interface PXI products using with CompactPCI 1 2 Q questions and answers C 1 to C 5 analog input and output C 2 to C 3 general information C 1 installation and configuration C 2 timing and digital I O C 3 to C 5 R RD signal description table 4 26 mode input timing figure 4 27 mode 2 bidirectiona
106. 9 to 30 VDC 17 W 9 to 25 VDC 4 65 to 5 25 VDC 4 65 to 5 25 VDC Excludes power consumed through 1 0 connector Discharge time with BP 1 battery pack FireWire 2 5 hours typical USB DAOPat tinte 3 hours typical Physical Dimensions Not Including Connectors 17 5 10 7 cm 6 9 4 2 in 16 0 by 10 0 cm 6 3 by 3 9 in DAOPad 30 cm 25 4 by 30 7 by 4 3 10 by 12 1 by 1 7 in DAOPad 15 cm 14 6 by 21 3 by 3 8 5 8 by 8 4 by 1 5 in PAULI zeiten Ernte Type Il PC Card 1 0 Connector 6070E 68 pin male 0 050 D type 6040E 6020E 6023E PCI 6024E DAQCard 6062E DAQCard 6024E 68 pin female VHDCI 6071E 100 pin female 0 050 D type 6025E Environment Operating 0 to 55 0 to 40 C for DAQCard 6062E and DAQCard 6024E with a maximum internal temperature of 70 as measured by onboard temperature sensor case temperature should not exceed 55 for any DAQCard 20to 70 10 to 90 noncondensing Storage temperature Relative humidity Certifications and Compliances CE Mark Compliance Refer to RTSI specifications for available RTSI trigger lines RTS not available on DAQCards See page 134 for RT Series devices power requiremen
107. AI HOLD AHOLD EBENE PFIY REFTRIG 10 44 06 PRIO AISTART 8 EXT STROBE EXTSTROBE 3 87 ALAS EXTSTROBE 37 8 15 PFIW REFTRIG 10 44 DGND PFIO AISTART 38 88 57 PFIO AISTART 38 88 GND DGND PHIZ ALCONV Deno 9 43 PFIVREFTRIG 39 89 A150 PFIVREFTRIG 3 8 5V 8 42 42 PFI2 AICONV 40 90 ALS PFIZ AICONV 40 90 GND DGND 7 41 PFI4 CTRIGATE T 8 3 Al CTR SRC PFI3 CTRISRC 41 90 PFISCTRISRC 41 91 DGND 7 4 PFIAJALCTR1G6ATE PFIA CTRIGATE 42 92 159 PFI4 CTRIGATE 42 92 GND vos BEP ax oe MINE PHSADSAMP GND PFIG AOSTART 5 39 06 39 PFIGAQ START D GND PFIG AO START 45 95 153 PFIG AOSTART 45 95 DGND 38 PFI7 AISAMP DGND 4 38 PFI7 AISAMP PFIT AISAMP 46 96 61 PFI7 AISAMP 46 PFIS CTROGATE 3 37 PFI8 CTROSRC PFIS CTROGATE 3 37 prig CTROSRC PFI 8 CTR 0 SRC 4 9 154 PFI 8 0 SRC 97 P1 0 Deno PFIQCTROGATE 48 98 4162 PFIS CTROGATE 48 98 GND CIROOUT 2 36 06 0 CTROOUT 49 99 55 CTROOUT 49 99 FOUT 1 35 DGND FOUT 1 35 DGND FOUT 50 100 Al63 FOUT 50 100 GND Figure 3 S Series Devices Connector Figure 4 0 Connector for 16 Channel Figure 5 1 0 Connector for Figure 6 1 0 Connector for E Series and Basic Multifunction DAQ 64 Channel E Series Devices the NI 6025E Device Devices except NI 6025E E Series Devices NI 6031E NI 6033E NI 6071E NI 6025E Platform Shieldin
108. APATHPHZEIZ inc FROM NEOTEK GREECE ND ioo 29 Feb 2004 14 04 1 1 DAE me amp amp Systems m H BEL E 2 renPronovaor 7 E M TEE LI 08 2004 x PU Te i WYKEHAM ENG LTD ii hk E EXETIKA 4 9028 3241 MOAYTEXNEIOY 5 EYNOAO LL LL LLL LL ic lnc 2030 ee parmesan iru AIT i FykaxaoTaon H Agttoupyt 1 V Bev IHE kat VS yivet bey ie pis LE TM l nepayyeAMa Serin wove r NEOTEK d n SVETPHE amp Xia T EA Bevig ou 105 N Xyupvn AOHNA 171 23 Tn amp 9359142 ue p FROM NEOTEK GREECE FAX NO 10109359778 89 Feb 2004 13 41 P172
109. ATE does not gate off conversions until the beginning of the next scan and conversely if conversions are gated off AIGATE does not gate them back on until the beginning of the next scan National Instruments Corporation 4 39 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Chapter 4 Signal Connections SISOURCE Signal Any PFI pin can externally input the SISOURCE signal which is not available as an output on the I O connector The onboard scan interval counter uses the SISOURCE signal as a clock to time the generation of the STARTSCAN signal You must configure the PFI pin you select as the source for the SISOURCE signal in the level detection mode You can configure the polarity selection for the PFI pin for either active high or active low The maximum allowed frequency is 20 MHz with a minimum pulse width of 23 ns high or low There is no minimum frequency limitation Either the 20 MHz or 100 kHz internal timebase generates the SISOURCE signal unless you select some external source Figure 4 29 shows the timing requirements for the SISOURCE signal tp 50 ns minimum tw 23 ns minimum Figure 4 29 SISOURCE Signal Timing Waveform Generation Timing Connections The analog group defined for your device is controlled by WFTRIG and UISOURCE WFTRIG Signal Any PFI pin can externally input the WFTRIG signal which is available as an output on the PFI6 WFTRIG pin As an input the WFTRIG signal is co
110. CANCLK is an output only signal that generates a pulse with the leading edge occurring approximately 50 to 100 ns after an A D conversion begins The polarity of this output is software selectable but is typically configured so that a low to high leading edge can clock external analog input multiplexers indicating when the input signal has been sampled and can be removed This signal has a 400 to 500 ns pulse width and is software enabled Figure 4 19 shows the timing for the SCANCLK signal CONVERT E ty iw 50 to 100 ns tw 400 to 500 ns Figure 4 19 SCANCLK Signal Timing EXTSTROBE Signal EXTSTROBE is an output only signal that generates either a single pulse or a sequence of eight pulses in the hardware strobe mode An external device can use this signal to latch signals or to trigger events In the single pulse mode software controls the level of the EXTSTROBE signal A 10 and a 1 2 us clock are available for generating a sequence of eight pulses in the hardware strobe mode Figure 4 20 shows the timing for the hardware strobe mode EXTSTROBE signal National Instruments Corporation 4 33 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Chapter 4 Signal Connections Lj ER VOL ty 600 ns or 5 Figure 4 20 EXTSTROBE Signal Timing TRIG1 Signal Any PFI pin can externally input the TRIGI signal which is available as an output on the
111. CTIONS COMPUTER OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE FITNESS FITNESS OF COMPILERS AND DEVELOPMENT SOFTWARE USED TO DEVELOP AN APPLICATION INSTALLATION ERRORS SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE COMPATIBILITY PROBLEMS MALFUNCTIONS OR FAILURES OF ELECTRONIC MONITORING OR CONTROL DEVICES TRANSIENT FAILURES OF ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS HARDWARE AND OR SOFTWARE UNANTICIPATED USES OR MISUSES OR ERRORS ON THE PART OF THE USER OR APPLICATIONS DESIGNER ADVERSE FACTORS SUCH AS THESE ARE HEREAFTER COLLECTIVELY TERMED SYSTEM FAILURES ANY APPLICATION WHERE A SYSTEM FAILURE WOULD CREATE A RISK OF HARM TO PROPERTY OR PERSONS INCLUDING THE RISK OF BODILY INJURY AND DEATH SHOULD NOT BE RELIANT SOLELY UPON ONE FORM OF ELECTRONIC SYSTEM DUE TO THE RISK OF SYSTEM FAILURE TO AVOID DAMAGE INJURY OR DEATH THE USER OR APPLICATION DESIGNER MUST TAKE REASONABLY PRUDENT STEPS TO PROTECT AGAINST SYSTEM FAILURES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO BACK UP OR SHUT DOWN MECHANISMS BECAUSE EACH END USER SYSTEM IS CUSTOMIZED AND DIFFERS FROM NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS TESTING PLATFORMS AND BECAUSE A USER OR APPLICATION DESIGNER MAY USE NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS PRODUCTS IN COMBINATION WITH OTHER PRODUCTS IN A MANNER NOT EVALUATED OR CONTEMPLATED BY NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS THE USER OR APPLICATION DESIGNER IS ULTIMATELY RESPONSIBLE FOR VERIFYING AND VALIDATING THE SUITABILITY OF NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS PRODUCTS WHENEVER NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS PRODUCTS ARE INCORPORATED IN A SYSTEM OR APPLICATION INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITAT
112. EBERERCRENSSRNERE MP riim ie VE E z Li LIId d Lid teehee be htt in iem s Pee KR BN pens p Total A3 00 WYKEHAM FARRANCE LOADMASTEB LOAD CELLS WPi7100 SERIES INTRODUCTION This Appendix describes the use of the following Wykeham Farrance products It is written as an appendix to the Wykeham Farrance CLISP software manual However it is self contained doucment and is also used as a Separate instruction and operating manual for these products These load 115 have been specifically designed by Wykeham Farrance for load measurement inside triaxial cells in order to eliminate the frictional load lose incurred by external load measurement The design is based on the use of strain gauged flanged web whose gauges are connected in sucha way as to provide signal proportional to the vertical load applied to the sample even if this load is not collinear with the specimen axis and to be insensitive to the fluid pressure with the triaxial ceil The strain gauges are chosen to be self compensating for temperature changes however an additional precaution is taken by providing a wiring configuration which ensures that even if some mismatch of the gauge Coefficient occurs the system is self compensating for temperature changes They can also be used externally under normal atmospheric conditions for such applications as direct shear or ring shear These loa
113. Excludes power consumed through available at the I O connector Power available at I O connector 4 65 to 45 25 VDC Physical Dimensions not including connectors PCI devices aere tes 17 5 by 10 6 cm 6 9 by 4 2 in PXI devices 16 0 by 10 0 cm 6 3 by 3 9 in National Instruments Corporation 9 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Appendix Specifications for PCI and PXI Buses T O connector 6023 6024 68 pin male SCSI II type 60258 100 pin female 0 05D type Operating Environment Ambient temperature 0 to 55 Relative humidity 10 to 90 noncondensing PXI 6025E only Functional shock MIL T 28800 E Class 3 per Section 4 5 5 4 1 Half sine shock pulse 11 ms duration 30 g peak 30 shocks per face Operational random vibration 5 to 500 Hz 0 31 3 axes Storage Environment Ambient temperature 20 to 70 C Relative humidity 596 to 9596 noncondensing PXI 6025E only Non operational random vibration 5 to 500 Hz 2 5 ga axes Note Random vibration profiles for the PXI 6025E were developed in accordance with MIL T 28800E and MIL STD 810E Method 514 Test levels exceed those recommended in MIL STD 810E for Category 1 Basic Transportation 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual A 10 ni com PCMCIA Bus Appendix A
114. G2 is not used in posttrigger applications PFI2 CONVERT DGND Input PFI2 Convert as an input this is one of PFIs Output As an output this is the CONVERT AI convert signal A high to low edge on CONVERT indicates that an A D conversion is occurring PFI3 GPCTR1_SOURCE DGND Input PFI3 Counter 1 Source as an input this is one of the PFIs Output As an output this is the GPCTR1_SOURCE signal This signal reflects the actual source connected to the general purpose counter 1 PFI4 GPCTR1_GATE DGND Input PFIA Counter 1 Gate as an input this is one of the PFIs Output As an output this is the GPCTR1_GATE signal This signal reflects the actual gate signal connected to the general purpose counter 1 GPCTRI OUT DGND Output Counter 1 Output this output is from the general purpose counter 1 output National Instruments Corporation 4 5 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Chapter 4 Signal Connections Table 4 2 1 0 Connector Signal Descriptions Continued Signal Name Reference Direction Description PFIS UPDATE DGND Input PFI5 Update as an input this is one of the PFIs Output As an output this is the UPDATE AO Update signal A high to low edge on UPDATE indicates that the analog output primary group is being updated for the 6024E or 6025E PFI6 WFTRIG DGND Input PFI6 Waveform Trigger as an input this is one of the As an output th
115. I 6025E Table 3 3 Pins Used by PXI E Series Device PXIE Series Signal PXI Pin Name PXI J2 Pin Number RTSI 0 5 PXI Trigger lt 0 5 gt B16 A16 A17 A18 18 C18 RTSI 6 PXI Star D17 RTSI Clock PXI Trigger 7 E16 Reserved LBL lt 0 3 gt C20 E20 19 C19 Reserved LBR lt 0 12 gt A21 C21 D21 E21 A20 B20 E15 A3 C3 D3 E3 A2 B2 Refer to the Timing Connections section of Chapter 4 Signal Connections for a description of the signals shown in Figures 3 5 and 3 6 National Instruments Corporation 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Signal Connections This chapter describes how to make input and output signal connections to your device through the I O connector Table 4 1 shows the cables that can be used with the I O connectors to connect to different accessories Table 4 1 1 0 Connector Details Cable for Cable for Cable for Connecting Connecting Connecting to Device with O Number of to 100 pin to 68 pin 50 pin Signal Connector Pins Accessories Accessories Accessories PCI 6023E 68 N A SH6868 Shielded SH6850 Shielded PCI 6024E Cable Cable R6868 Ribbon R6850 Ribbon Cable Cable DAQCard 6024E 68 N A SHC68 68EP 68M 50F Shielded Cable Adapter when RC68 68 Ribbon used with the Cable SHC68 68EP or RC68 68 6025E 100 SH100100 SH1006868 R1005050 Shielded Cable Shielded Cable Ribbon Cable Caution Connections that exceed any of the ma
116. ION THE APPROPRIATE DESIGN PROCESS AND SAFETY LEVEL OF SUCH SYSTEM OR APPLICATION Contents About This Manual Conventions Used in This 1 Related Documentation sente tt I er n RE EEE T EEEE xii Chapter 1 Introduction Features of the 6023E 6024E and 6025 1 1 Using PXI with CompactPCl eme eet epit 1 2 What You Need to Get Started 1 2 Software Programming Choices sess enne 1 3 National Instruments Application Software eese 1 3 NI DAQ enne enne enne 1 4 Optional Equipment RU e EI ERU HER Milani 1 5 Chapter 2 Installation and Configuration software Installation 5 rhe et E AER iens 2 1 Utpacking ER ot et e e EON BY cete ei Rte te AC RR 2 1 Hardware Installation neenon aa nennen enne nennen nnne nennen nennen 2 2 Hardware Configuration rs inherent ee n ee oe eet 2 3 Chapter 3 Hardware Overview Analog INPUT I Ue 3 2 Input Mode rrenaren tette 3 2 ERE E E ree I C oe eR t 3 3 c 3 4 Multichannel Scanning Considerations eee 3 5 Analog Output at oct ei rm PR 3 6 Analog Output Glitches a edet ee pte tne gle er pet 3 6 Digital M P ete 3 7 Timing Signal Routing aed een ob ut ete ite 3 7 Programmable Function Inp
117. Internal input fuse T3A15 250V HBC 1 127 terminal L Protection class EN 60950 Extra low safety SELV EN 60950 potential VDE 0100 Part 410 PELV EN 50178 R fng ration de convection Pr voir assez d espace libre pour la refroidissement Le courant de convection tant suffisant la difference de temp rature AT entre l air entrant et l air sortant mesur e au carter ne devrait pas d passer 15K environ Espace libre recommand aux c t s ayant des baies d a ration chaque 25mm Normes Autorisations 1 L appareil r pond aux normes suivantes CEM compatibilit lectromagn tique EN50081 1 et 2 mission de perturbation EN 55011 EN 55022 Classe B EN61000 6 2 ei EN 55024 r sistance aux perturbation VDE 0160 W2 r sistance aux transitoires S curit EN 60950 EN 60204 1 EN 50178 60950 UL 60950 UL 508 CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 CUR CAN CSA C22 2 No 14 CUL La caract risation CE se fait selon la directive la directive de la tension basse Remarques a dans la mesure aucune avis contraire n est indiqu sur l appareil l appareil livr avec pr s lectionn 12 V 0 5 b 200 kHz largeur de bande mesure 500 lt 2MV 20 MHz largeur de bande mesure 500 C pour des informations suppl mentaires voir la feuille annexe Installation et fonctionnement Tension nominale Vout Plage d a
118. MITED 3 MERCURY HOUSE CALLEVA PARK ALDERMASTON BERKSHIRE RG7 8PN UK Tel 44 0118 981 7339 Fax 44 0118 981 9121 email info appmeas co uk Internet www appmeas co uk SPECIFICATION Output CHARACTERISTICS STALC RatedCapacities i 3 5 10 25 50 100 lt 0 05 0 1 Temperature Range Operating 200 0 C Compensated 0t 50 1 0 k oD s9eefFSO7C SafeOverlad Rated Capacity Ultimate Overload Excitation Recommended 10 VeksACerDC Inputimpedance OutputImpedane lt 0 05 Stainless Steel Environmental Protection Fully submersible to 7000kPa Cable 3 Metre 4 Core Screened All dimensions in mm 4 core screened cable 15 1 8 BSP 9 5 gt lt 45 9 MIOxI 5x8DP APPLIED MEASUREMENTS LIMITED lor Continuous product development may result in minor changes to published specifications Wykeham Farrance i nf e t o an a tha eth BEER EE EE EEE ETE uic RH en HHE amar teste EN Hi d 1 PIA iiid PEAT TE BR
119. O6 DGND 5 DGND DGND PFIO TRIG1 PFH TRIG2 DGND 5 DGND PFI5 UPDATE PFI6 WFTRIG DGND PFI9 GPCTRO_GATE GPCTRO_OUT FREQ_OUT 6 AB 68 67 C2 66 65 o 64 63 62 61 60 59 AB 58 57 56 55 o 54 E 53 52 E N 51 A 50 E 49 gt 48 A w 47 46 k gt 45 E o 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 oO OD 0 35 1 Not available on the 6023E ACHO AIGND ACH9 ACH2 AIGND 11 AISENSE ACH12 5 AIGND ACH14 ACH7 AIGND AOGND AOGND DGND DIOO DIO5 DGND DIO2 DIO7 DIO3 SCANCLK EXTSTROBE DGND PFIZ CONVERT PFIS GPCTR1 SOURCE PFIA GPCTR1 GATE GPCTR1 OUT DGND PFI7 STARTSCAN PFIS GPCTRO SOURCE DGND DGND Figure B 1 68 Pin E Series Connector Pin Assignments B 3 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Custom Cabling and Optional Connectors 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Figure B 2 shows the pin assignments for the 68 pin extended digital input connector GND PC6 PC5 GND PC3 PC2 GND PCO PB7 GND PB5 PB4 GND GND PB1 PBO GND PA6
120. O_GATE signal 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual 4 44 ni com Chapter 4 Signal Connections Rising Edge Polarity Falling Edge Polarity ty 10 ns minimum Figure 4 36 GPCTRO_GATE Signal Timing in Edge Detection Mode GPCTRO_OUT Signal This signal is available only as an output on the GPCTRO_OUT pin The GPCTRO_OUT signal reflects the terminal count TC of general purpose counter 0 You have two software selectable output options pulse on TC and toggle output polarity on TC The output polarity is software selectable for both options This output is set to high impedance at startup Figure 4 37 shows the timing of the GPCTRO_OUT signal GPCTRO_SOURCE GPCTRO_OUT Pulse on TC GPCTRO_OUT Toggle Output on TC TC I Figure 4 37 GPCTRO_OUT Signal Timing GPCTRO_UP_DOWN Signal This signal can be externally input on the DIO6 pin and is not available as an output on the I O connector The general purpose counter 0 counts down when this pin is at a logic low and count up when it is at a logic high You can disable this input so that software can control the up down functionality and leave the DIO6 pin free for general use National Instruments Corporation 4 45 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Chapter 4 Signal Connections GPCTR1_SOURCE Signal Any PFI pin can externally input the GPCTR1_SOURCE signal which is availa
121. Overvoltage protection 607xE 6062E 6040E 325 V powered on 15 V powered off 35 V powered on 25 V powered off Input 10 Bandwidth 3 dB 607xE 6040E 1MHz 50 kHz 60206 ia 300 kHz Dynamic Characteristics FIFO Mode Non FIFO Mode Internally Externally Device Timed Timed 1 Channel 2 Channels 607xE 1 MS s 950 kS s 800 kS s 400 kS s 6040E system dependent system dependent 6062E 850 kS s 850 kS s 800 kS s 400 kS s system dependent system dependent 6023E N A N A 10 kS s with DMA 10 kS s with DMA PCI 6024E 1 kS s with interrupts 1 kS s with interrupts 6025E system dependent system dependent DAQCard 6024E N A N A 1 kS s with interrupts 1 kS s with interrupts system dependent system dependent DAQPad 6020E N A N A 20 S s 20 S s system dependent system dependent FIFO Buffer Size 607xE 6062E 2 048 samples 6040E 512 samples 602xE None Data transfers PCI PXI DAQPad for IEEE 1394 DMA interrupts programmed 1 0 DAQCard DAQPad for USB Interrupts programmed 1 0 DMA mades PCI PX DAQPad nn Scatter gather single transfer demand transfer Transfer Characteristics Relative accuracy After calibration 6062 DAQCard 6024E All others Before calibration DNL After calibration 6062E DAQCard 6024E All oti Before ca Monotonicity Gain error
122. PFIO TRIGI pin Refer to Figures 4 17 and 4 18 for the relationship of TRIGI to the sequence As an input the TRIGI signal is configured in edge detection mode You can select any PFI pin as the source for TRIGI and configure the polarity selection for either rising or falling edge The selected edge of the TRIGI signal starts the data acquisition sequence for both posttriggered and pretriggered acquisitions As an output the TRIGI signal reflects the action that initiates a DAQ sequence This is true even if the acquisition is externally triggered by another PFI The output is an active high pulse with a pulse width of 50 to 100 ns This output is set to high impedance at startup Figures 4 21 and 4 22 show the input and output timing requirements for the TRIGI signal Rising Edge Polarity Falling Edge Polarity tw 10 ns minimum 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Figure 4 21 TRIG1 Input Signal Timing 4 34 ni com Chapter 4 Signal Connections 1 1 1 i gt 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i ty 50 100 ns i 1 Figure 4 22 TRIG1 Output Signal Timing The device also uses the TRIGI signal to initiate pretriggered operations In most pretriggered applications the TRIGI signal is generated by a software trigger Refer to the TRIG2 signal description for a complete description of the use of TRIGI and TRIG2 in a pretriggered DAQ operation TRIG2 Sign
123. R CAN CSA C22 2 No 14 CUL CE Kennzeichnung erfolgt nach EMV Richtlinie und Niederspannungsrichtlinie Umgebungstemperatur Ty gemessen 25 mm unter Lufteintritt ins Geh use Lagerung Transport 25 85 Vollast 10 60 Derated 60 70 Schutzart 1 20 IEC60529 Vor Feuchtigkeit auch Betauung sch tzen Anmerkungen Hinweise sofern am nicht anders angegeben Ger teversand mit voreingestellter Br cke 12 V 20 596 b 200 kHz Bandbr 500 Messung 2mVss 20 MHz Bandbr 500 Messung 10mVss C siehe Beiblatt Installation und Betrieb f r weitere Informationen d Bei Standard Einbaulage vgl Bild rechts und ACin andere Bedingungen 2 Derating Fig 2 beachten Sicherheit Schutz Sicherheitshinweise beachten Siehe Beiblait installation und Betrieb Sicherheit und Schutz e berspannungsschutz v Vout Begrenzung bei sekundarseit max 18 V Uberlastfest e DauerkurzschluBfest Leerlauffest e Ubertemperaturschutz R ckeinspeise max 30 V festigkeit Interne Eingangs T3A15 250V HBC Sicherung IEC127 Klemme L Schutzklasse 1 EN 60950 Sicherheits SELV EN 60950 VDE 0100 Part 410 PELV kleinspannung EN 50178 ML30 102 Technical Data Connection to Mains AC Output DC out Raccord de r seau AC ML3
124. RICALINSTALLATION All types with the CE mark include suppression devices providing transient proteetion EN 61000 4 2 and EN 61000 4 4 Conformity with the requirements of the CE mark only applies wheu eonnection is made with Gems Sensors approved cable see Approved Cable section and is connected as shown below Millivolt Output Transducers Fuur core screened cable should be used with the cable screen connected to the instrumentation earth The cable screen should not be connectcd to the transducer body 420 mA Two wire Transmitters The screen of the cable must be earthed the instrumentation end fan Earth Loop problem is encountered when the body of the unit is earthed by the pipework it is permissable to remove the cable screen from the instrumentation earth mV Connections 420mA Connections 249 3864 249 3870 249 3959 Supply Pin 249 3943 249 3858 1 249 3937 vePin 1 249 3965 ve Output Pin 249 3921 ve Pin2 249 3836 ve Output Pin 3 249 3915 Earth 249 3820 Supply Earth 249 3892 249 3971 249 3886 WETTED PARTS 17 4PH stainless steel plus nickel Braze to BS1845 NK3 HTN2 APPROVED CABLE Gems Sensors uses cables comprising 2 3 or 4 colour coded cores enclosed by an alumnised polyester screen where the screen is in intimate contact with a separate drain wire The outer sheath is chrome PVC and overall diameter is approximately 4mm GENERAL Pressu
125. SI NCSL Z540 and periodic calibration ni com calibration services Extended Warranty Meet project life cycle requirements and maintain optimal performance in a cost effective way ni com services Data Acquisition Training Instructor led courses ni com training Professional Services Feasibility consulting and integration through our Alliance Partners ni com alliance For more information on NI services and support please visit ni com services Recommended Accessories Signal conditioning is required for sensor measurements or voltage inputs greater than 10 V National Instruments SCXI is a versatile high performance signal conditioning platform intended for high channel count applications NI SCC products provide portable flexible signal conditioning options on a per channel basis Both signal conditioning platforms are designed to increase the performance and reliability of your DAQ System and are up to 10X more accurate than terminal blocks please visit ni com sigcon for more details Refer to the table below for more information Sensor Signals gt 10 V System Description Device Signal Conditioning Page High performance 60 60 DAQCard 60xxE SCXI 210 Low cost portable PCI 60xxE PXI 60xxE DAQCard 60xxE SCC 251 Signals 10 V System Description Device Terminal Block Cable Page Shielded PCI 60xxE SCB 68 SH6868 EP 214 Shielded 60
126. TR and CTR functions plus more but you must rewrite the application with the GPCTR function calls Iam using one of the general purpose counter timers on my device but I do not see the counter timer output on the I O connector What am I doing wrong If you are using the NI DAQ language interface or LabWindows CVI you must configure the output line to output the signal to the I O connector Use the Select Signal call in NI DAQ to configure the output line By default all timing lines except EXTSTROBE are high impedance What are the PFIs and how do I configure these lines PFIs are programmable function inputs These lines serve as connections to virtually all internal timing signals If you are using the NI DAQ language interface or LabWindows CVI use the Select Signal function to route internal signals to the I O connector route external signals to internal timing sources or tie internal timing signals together If you are using NI DAQ with LabVIEW and you want to connect external signal sources to the PFI lines you can use AI Clock Config AI Trigger Config AO Clock Config AO Trigger and Gate Config CTR Mode Config and CTR Pulse Config advanced level VIs to indicate which function the connected signal serves Use the Route Signal VI to enable the PFI lines to output internal signals Caution If you enable a PFI line for output do not connect any external signal source to it if you do you can damage the device th
127. The Handbook of Wykeham Farrance GeoTriax Georgopoulos Ioannis Orestis Vardoulakis Ioannis October 17 2005 PhD Student NTU Athens Greece 2Professor NTU Athens Greece Nobody believes the numerical results but the numerician himself Everyone believes the experimental results but the experimentalist my beloved parents and sister Sarantos Panoraia and Eleni Figure 1 Arthur Casagrande Arthur Casagrande was born in August 28 1902 and educated in Austria He immigrated to the United States in 1926 There he accepted a research assistantship with the Bureau of Public Roads to work under Terzaghi at M I T While at M I T Professor Casagrande worked on soil classification shear testing and frost action in soils In 1932 he initiated a program in soil mechanics at Harvard University Professor Casagrande s work on soil classification seepage through earth structures and shear strength has had major influence on soil mechanics Professor Casagrande has been a very active consultant and has participated in many important jobs throughout the world His most important influence on soil mechanics however has been through his teaching at Harvard Many of the leaders in soil mechanics were inspired while students of his at Harvard Professor Casagrande served as President of the International Society of Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering during the period 1961 through 1965 He has been the Rankine Lecturer of the I
128. The instruments cannot be repaired locally and if damagec should be returned to ourselves at the address shown or to accredited dealers when a replacement repair is required TRANSINSTRUMENTS LENNOX ROAD BASINGSTOKE HANTS RG22 4AW RETURN TO FACTORY PLEASE NOTE To comply with Health and Safety requirements the instrument must be clean and safe to handle and accompanied by a format statement to that effect duly signed by an authorised officer of the Company Any instrument returned without certification will be quarantined and no action will occur until cleared It may ultimately be returned to you and subject to a transportation charge MAINTENANCE Routine Inspection Not required except for periodic inspection of the cable and connector to ensure that these are neither damaged nor softened by incompatible liquid 558140 0032 ISSUE PAGE 4 Handbook for use with WF17029 Transducer Block Serial No WYKEHAM FARRANCE ENGINEERING LIMITED Telephone 0753 571241 Weston Road Telefax 0753 811313 Trading Estate Telex 847301 WFENG G Slough Berks SL1 4HW England The in triaxial testing To assemble the system 1 Connect the transducer block at D to the pore pressure valve on the triaxial cell Fig 2 2 Screw the pressure transducer with its sealing washer in to the bottom of the de airing block at E as shown in Fig 1 Fig 2 IN iO Te K Evov pnota
129. Transducer 2200AGB1001A2UA003 Port 02 GeoLab GIO 8 NITHE 23 November 2004 PCI 6024E 1400 1 200 26 1 000 a F 800 a 2 e o S 5 600 e y 9 876x 3 584 E PEU 1 000 a 400 y 9 560 9 689 eT 0 995 200 20 0 Par 0 200 40 0 60 0 80 0 1000 1200 140 0 Figure 2 10 2004 11 23 Voltage mV 2200AGB1001A2UA003 Pore Pressure Port2 Calibration 14 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax Operator GIO GIO amp NITHE Place GeoLab GeoLab Date 2004 07 05 2004 11 23 Time 18 05 13 55 Maximum pressure 10 0bar 10 0bar Calibration constant 9 953kPa mV 10 015kPa mV Linearity 99 999696 99 999 Excitation voltage 10 11 Volts 10 11 Volts Voltage Sensitivity 9 90mV V 9 36mV V Sampling rate 1 000samples sec 1 000samples sec Temperature 30 19 24 00 Humidity 30 31 Table 2 3 2200AGB1001A2UA003 Cell Pressure Port3 Calibration Table Operator GIO GIO amp NITHE Place GeoLab GeoLab Date 2004 07 05 2004 11 23 Time 16 05 13 55 Maximum pressure 10 0bar 10 0bar Calibration constant 9 946kPa mV 10 003kPa mV Linearity 99 996 99 999 Excitation voltage 10 11 Volts 10 11 Volts Voltage Sensitivity 9 89mV V 9 35mV V Sampling rate 1 000samples sec 1 000samples sec Temperature 30 00 31 00 Humidity 31 24 Table 2 4 RS Type 249 T023096 Pore Pressure Port4 Calibration Table green output voltage blue output voltage yellow and ground shield Table 2 3 summarises the main
130. Vdc Sensitivity 2 095mV V Non linearity 0 048 FS xi Hysteresis 0 02996 FS Supply Voltage 10 00Vdc Bridge Resistance 240 ohms Insulation Resistance 7 1000 megohms at 100Vdc Electrical Connections Red ve excitation Green ve signal Yellow ve signai Blue ve excitation Applied Measurements Limited hereby certifies that the above items have been inspected tested and calibrated using NAMAS traceable test equipment in all respects with the requirements of the customer s order Wykeham Forronce Intemational Limited Registered in England No 360538 VAT Reg No GB 207 9025 75 Figure 2 30 STALC3 50kN 24937 submersible load cell reference manual 31 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax 32 W Wykeham Farrance terna tton a Weston Road Slough SLI 4HW England Tel 44 0 1753 571241 Fax 44 0 1753 811313 CALIBRATION CERTIFICATE E Mail 101333 1232 compuserve com Calibration of transducer Date 5 August 2004 Calibration Results Transducer Type STALC3 50kN Serial No 24937 Load Rating 50kN Proof Rating 75 Zero Output 0 052 10Vdc Sensitivity 2 095mV V Non linearity 0 048 FS Hysteresis 0 02996 FS Supply Voltage 10 00Vdc Bridge Resistance 240 ohms Insulation Resistance gt 1000 megohms at 100Vdc Electrical Connections Red ve excitation Green ve signal Yellow ve signal Blue ve excitation Applied Measurements Limited hereby certifies that the above items ha
131. XI Buses Number of channels 6025 indere ep 32 input output 6023E and 6024 8 input output Compatibility TTL CMOS 010 lt 0 7 gt Digital logic levels Level Min Max Input low voltage 0 8 Input high voltage 2V 5V Input low current 0 V 320 Input high current 5 10 Output low voltage Io 24 mA 0 4 Output high voltage 13 mA 4 35 Power on Input High Z 50 pull up to 5 VDC Data transfers oe nee tts Programmed I O PA lt 0 7 gt PB lt 0 7 gt PC lt 0 7 gt 6025E only Digital logic levels Level Min Max Input low voltage OV 0 8 V Input high voltage 2 2 V 5V Input low current 0 V 100 KQ pull up 15 Input high current V 5 V 100 kQ pull up 10 Output low voltage Io 2 5 mA 0 4 Output high voltage Ion 2 5 mA 3 7V National Instruments Corporation A 7 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Appendix Specifications for PCI and PXI Buses Handshaking 2 wire Power on state PASO Input High Z 100 kQ pull up to 5 VDC PB lt O 7S aint nde Input High Z 100 kQ pull up to 5 VDC eed Input High Z 100 kQ pull up to 5 VDC Data tr nsferS ce eee meis Interrupts programmed I O Timing 1 0 Number of channels 2 up down counter timers
132. al Any PFI pin can externally input the TRIG2 signal which is available as an output on the PFII TRIG2 pin Refer to Figure 4 18 for the relationship of TRIG2 to the sequence As an input the TRIG2 signal is configured in the edge detection mode You can select any PFI pin as the source for TRIG2 and configure the polarity selection for either rising or falling edge The selected edge of the 2 signal initiates the posttriggered phase of a pretriggered acquisition sequence In pretriggered mode the TRIGI signal initiates the data acquisition The scan counter indicates the minimum number of scans before TRIG2 can be recognized After the scan counter decrements to Zero it is loaded with the number of posttrigger scans to acquire while the acquisition continues The device ignores the TRIG2 signal if it is asserted prior to the scan counter decrementing to zero After the selected edge of TRIG2 is received the device acquires a fixed number of scans and the acquisition stops This mode acquires data both before and after receiving TRIG2 As an output the TRIG2 signal reflects the posttrigger in a pretriggered acquisition sequence This is true even if the acquisition is externally triggered by another PFI The TRIG2 signal is not used in posttriggered data acquisition The output is an active high pulse with a pulse width of 50 to 100 ns This output is set to high impedance at startup National Instruments Corporation 4 85
133. al diaphragm back to it original set rate position Wykeham Farrance 5 Wykeham Farrance Lo 5 WYKEHAM H 9 SLOUGH 5 gt High Accuracy gt 0 05ml gt Limitless Capacity gt Can be used with a digital dial gauge or transducer Automatic Volume CF a nge Apparatus The WFi automatic volume change apparatus is a 100cc capacity unit which allows the accurate determination of volume change in a soil sample It can also be used to measure permeability A Total Solution Provider Technical Specification The automatic volume change apparatus consists of calibrated chamber of known volume and a piston machined to tight tolerances to give a precise measurement of the changing volume within the cylinder As the piston moves an external measuring device either an electronic dial gauge or an LVDT either records or transmits the change in volume to a data logger If the change in volume exceeds 100cc then changeover valve allows the internal piston to move in the opposite direction This can be repeated until volume change has completed Similarly large volumes of water can be measured during permeability testing Specification Capacit Accuracy Nett weight Initially 100cc gt 0 05ml 7kg Ordering Information Part No Volume Change Apparatus 100cc capacity complete with change 17044 over valves Linear strain transducer 25mm travel 17015 Bracket to fit
134. al for the gate to take effect at that source edge as shown by t and t in Figure 4 41 The gate signal is not required to be held after the active edge of the source signal 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual 4 48 ni com Chapter 4 Signal Connections If you use an internal timebase clock the gate signal cannot be synchronized with the clock In this case gates applied close to a source edge take effect either on that source edge or on the next one This arrangement results in an uncertainty of one source clock period with respect to unsynchronized gating sources The OUT output timing parameters are referenced to the signal at the SOURCE input or to one of the internally generated clock signals on the devices Figure 4 41 shows the OUT signal referenced to the rising edge of source signal Any OUT signal state changes occur within 80 ns after the rising or falling edge of the source signal FREQ_OUT Signal This signal is available only as an output on the FREQ OUT pin The frequency generator of the device outputs the FREQ OUT pin The frequency generator is a 4 bit counter that can divide its input clock by the numbers 1 through 16 The input clock of the frequency generator is software selectable from the internal 10 MHz and 100 kHz timebases The output polarity is software selectable This output is set to high impedance at startup Field Wiring Considerations Environmental noise can seriously affect the accuracy of measureme
135. alibration of Pressure Transducer S 086219 Port 01 GeoLab GIO 8 NITHE 23 November 2004 PCI 6024E 1 200 4 1 000 4 800 4 600 4 400 200 9 655 10 085 get y 10 016 1 784 ect 1 000 0 997 ae a A 0 20 0 200 40 0 60 0 80 0 100 0 120 0 140 0 Voltage mV Figure 2 7 RS Type 249 5086219 Pressure Port1 Calibration 2004 11 23 12 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax Operator GIO GIO amp NITHE Place GeoLab GeoLab Date 2004 07 05 2004 11 23 Time 17 10 13 55 Maximum pressure 10 0bar 10 0bar Calibration constant 9 989kPa mV 9 876kPa mV Linearity 99 999 99 999 Excitation voltage 10 11 Volts 10 11 Volts Voltage Sensitivity 9 83mV V 9 48mV V Sampling rate 1 000samples sec 1 000samples sec Temperature 30 00 24 00 Humidity 30 31 Table 2 2 2200AGB1001A2UA003 Pore Pressure Port2 Calibration Table Figure 2 8 Pore pressure line Port2 13 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax Pressure kPa Calibration of Pressure Transducer 2200AGB1001A2UA003 Port 02 GeoLab GlO 05 July 2004 PCI 6024E 1 200 4 1 000 4 800 600 400 200 a y 9 949x 5 778 s 1 000 y 9 791 5 357 R 1 000 20 0 40 0 60 0 80 0 100 0 120 0 140 0 Voltage mV Figure 2 9 2200AGB1001A2UA003 Pore Pressure Port2 Calibration 2004 07 05 Calibration of Pressure
136. ams the factor by which a signal is amplified sometimes expressed in decibels gate signal an unwanted momentary deviation from a desired signal general purpose counter general purpose counter 0 gate signal general purpose counter 0 output signal general purpose counter 0 clock source signal general purpose counter 0 up down general purpose counter gate signal general purpose counter output signal general purpose counter clock source signal National Instruments Corporation G 5 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Glossary GPCTR1_UP_DOWN GPIB grounded measurement system H h hex Hz INL input bias current input impedance input offset current instrumentation amplifier interrupt I O 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual general purpose counter 1 up down General Purpose Interface bus synonymous with HP IB The standard bus used for controlling electronic instruments with a computer Also called IEEE 488 bus because it is defined by ANSI IEEE Standards 488 1978 488 1 1987 and 488 2 1987 See RSE hour hexadecimal hertz cycles per second of a periodic signal integral nonlinearity a measure in LSB of the worst case deviation from the ideal A D or D A transfer characteristic of the analog I O circuitry the current that flows into the inputs of a circuit the measured resistance and capacitance between the input terminals of a circuit the difference in the input bias currents of
137. an substitute smaller resistor values to lower the voltage or to provide a margin for variations and other factors However smaller values draw more current leaving less drive current for other circuitry connected to this line The 7 1 resistor reduces the amount of logic high source current by 0 4 mA with a 2 8 V output Timing Specifications 6025E only This section lists the timing specifications for handshaking with your 6025E lt 0 7 gt lines The handshaking lines STB and IBF synchronize input transfers The handshaking lines OBF and ACK synchronize output transfers Table 4 5 describes signals appearing in the handshaking diagrams Table 4 5 Signal Names Used in Timing Diagrams Name Type Description STB Input Strobe input a low signal on this handshaking line loads data into the input latch IBF Output Input buffer full a high signal on this handshaking line indicates that data has been loaded into the input latch A low signal indicates the device is ready for more data This is an input acknowledge signal National Instruments Corporation 4 25 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Chapter 4 Signal Connections Table 4 5 Signal Names Used in Timing Diagrams Continued Name Type Description ACK Input Acknowledge input a low signal on this handshaking line indicates that the data written to the port has been accepted This signal i
138. ans ducer 4 WYKEHAM FARRANCE WF17021 WF17022 WF17060 Pressure Transducers MAINTENANCE About once every six months i pai detec system should then be thoroughly flushed Teen with Water until all the detergent and any accumulated dirt is removed No other maintenance is necessary The transducer does NOT CONTAIN ANY USER SERVICABLE COMPONENTS other than the DIN plug WYKEHAM FARRANCE 5 285 BEN VIEW CART QWIK CONFIGS PARTNERSIGN IN OPT IN LIVE HEL Liquid Level Flow and Pressure Sensors saw Search Local Region Sites 8 Im Home AboutUs Products amp Markets Literature News Order Status Contact Jobs PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS 2200 Series PDF Catalog Page General Purpose Indusirial Pressure Transducers Vacuum to 6000 psi 400 Ga Instruction Bulletins Millivolt Voltage and Current Output Models Gauge Absolute Vacuum and Compound Pressure Models Available Submersible General Purpose and Wash down Enclosures High Stability Achieved by CVD Sensing Element The 2200 series features stability and accuracy in a variety of enclosure options The 2200 series feature proven CVD sensing technology an ASIC amplified units and modular packaging to provide a sensor line that can easily accommodate specials while not sacrificing high performance Typical Applications Off Highway Vehi
139. ation 0 5 mV max Postgain error before calibration 100 mV max Gain error relative to calibration reference After calibration gain 1 0 02 of reading max Before calibration 2 75 of reading max Gain with gain error adjusted to 0 at gain 1 0 05 of reading max Amplifier Characteristics Input impedance Normal powered on 100 in parallel with 100 pF Powered off sess 4 min Overload 55 erret 4 min Input bias current 200 pA Input offset 100 pA CMRR DC to 60 Hz Gain 05 1 Ob cota Re 85 dB Gait 10 TOO eh te 90 dB National Instruments Corporation 3 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Appendix Specifications for PCI and PXI Buses Dynamic Characteristics Bandwidth Signal Bandwidth Small 3 dB 500 kHz Large 1 THD 225 kHz Settling time for full scale step 5 us max to 1 0 LSB accuracy System noise LSB s not including quantization Gain Dither Off Dither On 0 5 to 10 0 1 0 6 100 0 7 0 8 Crosstalk 60 dB DC to 100 kHz Stability Recommended warm up time 15 min Offset temperature coefficient Pregaln 15 Postgain cete nee 240 uV C Gain temperature coefficient 20
140. ble as an output on the PFI3 GPCTR1_SOURCE pin As an input the GPCTR1_SOURCE signal is configured in the edge detection mode You can select any PFI pin as the source for GPCTR1_SOURCE and configure the polarity selection for either rising or falling edge As an output the GPCTR1_SOURCE monitors the actual clock connected to general purpose counter 1 This is true even if the source clock is externally generated by another PFI This output is set to high impedance at startup Figure 4 38 shows the timing requirements for the GPCTR1_SOURCE signal tp 50 ns minimum tw 23 ns minimum Figure 4 38 GPCTR1_SOURCE Signal Timing The maximum allowed frequency is 20 MHz with a minimum pulse width of 23 ns high or low There is no minimum frequency limitation The 20 MHz or 100 kHz timebase normally generates the GPCTR1_SOURCE unless you select some external source GPCTR1 GATE Signal Any PFI pin can externally input the signal which is available as an output on the PFI4 GPCTR1_GATE pin As an input the GPCTR1_GATE signal is configured in edge detection mode You can select any PFI pin as the source for and configure the polarity selection for either rising or falling edge You can use the gate signal in a variety of different applications to perform such actions as starting and stopping the counter generating interrupts saving the counter contents and so on 6023E 6024E
141. cal support resources on our Web site and still cannot find the answers you need contact your local office or National Instruments corporate Phone numbers for our worldwide offices are listed at the front of this manual 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual D 2 ni com Glossary Prefix Meanings Value p pico 10 2 n nano 10 9 u micro 10 6 m milli 10 3 kilo 103 mega 106 G giga 10 t tera 102 Numbers Symbols degree gt greater than lt less than negative of or minus Q ohm per percent plus or minus positive of or plus square root of 5 V 5 VDC source signal National Instruments Corporation G 1 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Glossary A A AC ACH A D ADC ADC resolution Al AIGATE AIGND AISENSE ANSI AO AOGND ASIC base address bipolar breakdown voltage 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual amperes alternating current analog input channel signal analog to digital analog to digital converter an electronic device often an integrated circuit that converts an analog voltage to a digital number the resolution of the ADC which is measured in bits An ADC with 16 bits has a higher resolution and thus a higher degree of accuracy than a 12 bit ADC analog input analog input gate signal analog input ground signal analog input sense signal American National Standards Institute analog output analog o
142. calibrates its own A D and D A circuits without manual adjustments by the user a device that converts a physical phenomenon into an electrical signal the amount of time required for a voltage to reach its final value within specified accuracy limits the manipulation of signals to prepare them for digitizing G 10 ni com SISOURCE software trigger software triggering SOURCE S s STARTSCAN STC synchronous TC THD THD N TRIG trigger TTL U UI unipolar UISOURCE National Instruments Corporation 6 11 Glossary SI counter clock signal a programmed event that triggers an event such as data acquisition a method of triggering in which you simulate an analog trigger using software Also called conditional retrieval source signal samples per second used to express the rate at which a DAQ board samples an analog signal start scan signal system timing controller 1 hardware a property of an event that is synchronized to a reference clock 2 software a property of a function that begins an operation and returns only when the operation is complete terminal count the highest value of a counter total harmonic distortion signal to THD plus noise the ratio in decibels of the overall rms signal to the rms signal of harmonic distortion plus noise introduced trigger signal any event that causes or starts some form of data capture transistor transistor logic update interval a signal ran
143. can result if these lines are driven by the sub bus What You Need to Get Started 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual To set up and use your device you need the following One of the following devices PCI 6023E PCI 6024E 6025 PXI 6025E DAQCard 6024E 1 2 ni com Chapter 1 Introduction L 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual One of the following software packages and documentation LabVIEW for Windows Measurement Studio VirtualBench NI DAQ for PC Compatibles Your computer equipped with one of the following PCI bus for a PCI device or CompactPCI chassis and controller for a PXI device Type II PCMCIA slot for a DAQCard device hy Note Read Chapter 2 Installation and Configuration before installing your device Always install your software before installing your device Software Programming Choices When programming your National Instruments DAQ and SCXI hardware you can use National Instruments application software or another application development environment ADE In either case you use NI DAQ National Instruments Application Software LabVIEW features interactive graphics a state of the art user interface and a powerful graphical programming language The LabVIEW Data Acquisition VI Library a series of virtual instruments for using LabVIEW with National Instruments DAQ hardware is included with LabVIEW The LabVIEW Data Acquisition VI
144. ce instructions owner s modification of the product owner s abuse misuse or negligent acts and power failure or surges fire flood accident actions of third parties or other events outside reasonable control Copyright Under the copyright laws this publication may not be reproduced or transmitted in any form electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording storing in an information retrieval system or translating in whole or in part without the prior written consent of National Instruments Corporation Trademarks CVI DAQ STC LabVIEW Measurement Studio MITE National Instruments ni com NI DAQ NI PGIA PXI RTSI SCXI and VirtualBench are trademarks of National Instruments Corporation Product and company names mentioned herein are trademarks or trade names of their respective companies WARNING REGARDING USE OF NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS PRODUCTS 1 NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS PRODUCTS ARE NOT DESIGNED WITH COMPONENTS AND TESTING FOR A LEVEL OF RELIABILITY SUITABLE FOR USE IN OR IN CONNECTION WITH SURGICAL IMPLANTS OR AS CRITICAL COMPONENTS IN ANY LIFE SUPPORT SYSTEMS WHOSE FAILURE TO PERFORM CAN REASONABLY BE EXPECTED TO CAUSE SIGNIFICANT INJURY TO A HUMAN 2 IN ANY APPLICATION INCLUDING THE ABOVE RELIABILITY OF OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE PRODUCTS CAN BE IMPAIRED BY ADVERSE FACTORS INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO FLUCTUATIONS IN ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY COMPUTER HARDWARE MALFUN
145. cles Natural Gas Equipment Semiconductor Processing Power Plants Refrigeration Robotics Specifications Pressure Range Vacuum to 400 bar 6000 psi Proof Pressure 2 x Full Scale FS 1 5 x Fs for 400 bar gt 5000 Burst Pressure gt 35 x FS lt 6 bar 100 psi gt 20 x FS gt 60 bar 1 Fatigue Life Designed for more than 100 million FS cycles Long Term Drift 0 2 FS year non cumulative Accuracy 0 25 FS typical optional 0 15 FS Thermal Error 1 5 FS typical optional 1 FS Response Time Enclosure 316 ss 17 4 PH ss IP65 for elec codes A B C Vibration 70g peak to peak sinusoidal 5 to 2000 Hz Rando Acceleration 100g steady acceleration in any direction 0 03296 F Shock 20g 11 ms per MIL STD 810E Method 516 4 Proced Approvals CE UR 22ET 26ET Intrinsically safe Weight Approx 100 grams additional cable 75 g m Millivolt Output units Output 100 mV 10 mv v Supply Voltage Vs 10 Vdc 15 Vdc max Regulated Bridge resistance 2600 6000 ohms Min Load Resistance Current Consumption FS output 2 Kohms approx 6 mA at 7 5V output Max Loop Resistance Vs 7 x 50 ohms How To Order To order this product simply select from the drop boxes below to construct your product code The pricing and lead time will displayed on a new page enter the quantity you need and the item will be added to your shopping cart 11 Basic 2
146. closer look of the terminal box an on off switch equipped with a 6A fuse is used to fire up the eight transducers and is found for safety reasons in the lower side of the terminal box An AC DC transformer is used to provide a stable DC 10Volts as excitation voltage to the above mentioned transducers It has a maximum power of 30Watts 3A in 10Volts or 2 5A in 12Volts The connection diagram of the 5 pin 240 pole type cable plugs for all transducers is the same for safety reasons and is as follows Looking from the right to the left counterclockwise the first pin of the cable plug is the excitation the second the excitation the third is the neutral or earth where the shield of the cable is usually connected to the fourth is the output while the fifth is the output 45 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax Figure 4 7 Typical DIN 5 pin 240 pole type cable plugs In order to have a more robust connection between the transducers and the analog digital input output card a CB 68LP connector board is also mounted inside the terminal box A RC68 68 1 cable is used to connect the analog digital input output card with the connector board In this way the analog output signal from the transducers is transmitted to the card via a cable allowing for quick removal of the transducers cable plugs in case of unplugging the transducers from the terminal box Finally for quick removal of the terminal box componen
147. conventions used in manual xi xii related documentation xii E EEPROM storage of calibration constants 5 1 environment specifications PCI and PXI buses A 10 PCMCIA bus A 18 environmental noise 4 49 equipment optional 1 5 to 1 6 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Index EXTSTROBE signal DAQ timing connections 4 33 to 4 34 description table 4 5 signal summary table 4 7 F field wiring considerations 4 49 floating signal sources description 4 9 differential connections 4 15 to 4 16 single ended connections RSE configuration 4 18 FREQ_OUT signal description table 4 6 general purpose timing signal connections 4 49 signal summary table 4 8 frequently asked questions See questions and answers fuse self resetting C 1 G gain error adjusting 5 3 general purpose timing signal connections 4 43 to 4 49 FREQ OUT signal 4 49 GPCTRO GATE signal 4 44 to 4 45 GPCTRO OUT signal 4 45 GPCTRO SOURCE signal 4 43 to 4 44 GPCTRO UP DOWN signal 4 45 signal 4 46 to 4 47 OUT signal 4 47 SOURCE signal 4 46 UP DOWN signal 4 47 to 4 49 glitch analog output 3 6 GPCTRO GATE signal 4 44 to 4 45 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual l 4 GPCTRO_OUT signal description table 4 6 general purpose timing signal connections 4 45 signal summary table 4 8 GPCTRO_SOURCE signal 4 43 to 4 44 GPCTRO_UP_DOWN signal 4 45 signal
148. cteristics Settling time for full scale step Slew Tate es estet eee uin Midscale transition glitch Magnitude esses D r atiomn ineo met National Instruments Corporation A 15 0 01 of output max 0 75 of output max 10 DC 0 1 Q max 5 mA max Short circuit to ground 200 mV 1 5 1 08 1 5 1 05 10 us to 0 5 LSB accuracy 10 V us 200 uVrms DC to 1 MHz 20 mV 2 5 Us 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Appendix Specifications for Bus Digital 1 0 Timing 1 0 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Stability Offset temperature coefficient Gain temperature coefficient Number of channels 50 25 ppm C 8 input output Compatibility eee TTL CMOS 010 lt 0 7 gt Digital logic levels Level Min Max Input low voltage OV 0 8 V Input high voltage 2V 5V Input low current Vin 0 V 320 uA Input high current Vi 5 V 10 uA Output low voltage Io 24 mA 0 4 Output high voltage 13 mA 4 35 V Power on Data Number of channels Resolution Counter timers Frequency scalers
149. d National Instruments Corporation 4 47 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Chapter 4 Signal Connections leave the DIO7 pin free for general use Figure 4 41 shows the timing requirements for the GATE and SOURCE input signals and the timing specifications for the OUT output signals of your device 4 tsc gt tsp io i i i mm SOURCE ONO y V IL tgsu 4 ign 4 V IH X V IL lt 4 tout Vou UT V L OL Source Clock Period ts 50 ns minimum Source Pulse Width tsp 23 ns minimum Gate Setup Time tosu 10 ns minimum Gate Hold Time toh Ons minimum Gate Pulse Width tw 10 ns minimum Output Delay Time tout 80 ns maximum Figure 4 41 GPCTR Timing Summary The GATE and OUT signal transitions shown in Figure 4 41 are referenced to the rising edge of the SOURCE signal This timing diagram assumes that the counters are programmed to count rising edges The same timing diagram but with the source signal inverted and referenced to the falling edge of the source signal applies when the counter is programmed to count falling edges The GATE input timing parameters are referenced to the signal at the SOURCE input or to one of the internally generated signals on your device Figure 4 41 shows the GATE signal referenced to the rising edge of a source signal The gate must be valid either high or low for at least 10 ns before the rising or falling edge of a source sign
150. d Signal Sources Figure 4 5 shows how to connect a ground referenced signal source to a channel on the device configured in DIFF input mode Ground Referenced 61 Signal Programmable Gain S Vs Instrumentation ee Amplifier z Measured Common s Voltage Mode Noise and V 55 A Potential ji E o Input Multiplexers AISENSE AIGND Connector Selected Channel in DIFF Configuration Figure 4 5 Differential Input Connections for Ground Referenced Signals With this type of connection the PGIA rejects both the common mode noise in the signal and the ground potential difference between the signal source and the device ground shown as in Figure 4 5 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual 4 14 ni com Chapter 4 Signal Connections Differential Connections for Nonreferenced or Floating Signal Sources Figure 4 6 shows how to connect a floating signal source to a channel configured in DIFF input mode ACH Bias resistors see text o Programmable Gain Instrumentation Amplifier Measured Voltage Floating Signal vs J Source 2 5 55 ACH
151. d a pull down resistor whose value gives you a maximum of 0 4 VDC The DIO lines provide a maximum of 2 5 mA at 3 7 V in the high state Using the largest possible resistor ensures that you do not use more current than necessary to perform the pull down task However make sure the value of the resistor is not so large that leakage current from the DIO line along with the current from the 100 KQ pull up resistor drives the voltage at the resistor above a TTL low level of 0 4 VDC Figure 4 12 shows the DIO configuration for high DIO power up state Device 5V 100 k 82C55 Digital I O Line 1 RL Figure 4 12 DIO Channel Configured for High DIO Power up State with External Load Example A given DIO line is pulled high at power up To pull it low on power up with an external resistor follow these steps 1 Install a load Remember that the smaller the resistance the greater the current consumption and the lower the voltage 4 24 ni com Chapter 4 Signal Connections 2 Using the following formula calculate the largest possible load to maintain a logic low level of 0 4 V and supply the maximum driving current V IXRL RL VI I where V 04V Voltage across RL 1 46 0 4 6 V across the 100 pull up resistor and 10 uA maximum leakage current Therefore RL 7 1 KQ 0 4 56 uA This resistor value 7 1 provides a maximum of 0 4 V on the DIO line at power up You c
152. d cells are fitted with 0 ring seal which seals against the triaxial cell piston The load cells ARE NOT locked into place with sealing compound They can therefere be moved from cell to cell should the need arise However the qreatest care must be exercised when handiing load cells as they are precision made scientific instruments Unlike earlier generations of load ceils the WF17100 series have an over load capacity of 200 per cent However WE DO NOT RECOMMEND that these load cells are INTENTIONALLY OVERLOADED Another improvement over earlier generation of load 115 is the fact that the cable can resoldered into place if accidentally broken rf Y A 3 0 1 amp 3 0 2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION MECHANICAL Nominal Diameter 76 Nominal Height 30 mm ELECTRICAL Excitation 10 D C 15 vdc max Input resistance 385 ohms output ohms Output range 2mV v nominal Non linearity nominally 0 5 scale max Thermal Sensitivity shift 0 01 degree C max Hysteresis 0 05 per cent FS max ENVIRONMENTAL RANGES AVAILABLE 500 kgf 5kN 1000 kgf LOKN 2500 kgf 25kN resistance 350 per cent full per cent FS Operating temperature range 0 degree to 50 degree Pressure range up to 70 MN m2 These units will operate in any environment compatible with 18 8 and EN57 stainless steel 3 0 4 CALIBRATION OF LOAD CELLS The most accurate method of calibrating th
153. d to show the volume displaced and or the display on the readout device should be adjusted to the same volume Because of the need for accuracy this calibration procedure should be carried o intil an acceptable agreement between the measured volumes and the digital displays has been achieved Please note that you should attempt to calibrate in one direction only If you wish to use the volume change apparatus in both directions during a test you must check direction quaes trt digo i n the original direction then use correction factors if necessary to overcome any small hysteresis in the transducer or dial gauge Such procedures as shown above reduce any backlash in the apparatus to a minimum for small volume changes or research level work 4 Wykeham Farrance Automatic Volume Change WF17043 AUTOMATIC VOLUME CHANGE When using the automatic volume change device without a reversing module which must be connected to the users own valve or plumbing system the unit includes a length of tubing for this purpose The unit must then be reversed using the existing system of valves plumbed into the users system It is because this approach can result in a large and complex pipework network that we supply the control module as an optional extra If the unit is used directly in your pressure line without any provision for reversing flow it is necessary to apply a second pressure in the opposite direction to move the intern
154. dex Numbers 5 V signal description table 4 4 self resetting fuse C 1 82C55A Programmable Peripheral Interface See PPI Programmable Peripheral Interface 6023E 6024E 6025E devices See also hardware overview specifications block diagram 3 1 features 1 1 to 1 2 optional equipment 1 5 to 1 6 requirements for getting started 1 2 to 1 3 software programming choices 1 3 to 1 5 National Instruments application software 1 3 to 1 4 NI DAQ driver software 1 4 to 1 5 unpacking 2 1 using PXI with CompactPCI 1 2 A lt 0 15 gt signal description table 4 4 signal summary table 4 7 ACK signal description table 4 26 mode 1 output timing figure 4 28 mode 2 bidirectional timing figure 4 29 acquisition timing connections See DAQ timing connections AIGATE signal 4 39 AIGND signal analog input mode 4 10 description table 4 4 signal summary table 4 7 National Instruments Corporation AISENSE signal description table 4 4 NRSE mode 4 10 signal summary table 4 7 analog input available input configurations table 3 3 common questions C 2 to C 3 dithering 3 4 to 3 5 input modes 3 2 to 3 3 input range 3 3 multichannel scanning considerations 3 5 to 3 6 analog input signal connections 4 8 to 4 19 common mode signal rejection considerations 4 19 differential connections 4 13 to 4 16 ground referenced signal sources 4 14 nonreferenced or floating signal sources 4 15 t
155. e DMA channel for analog out put 1kS s maximum when using the single DMA channel for either analog input or counter timer operations 1 kS s maximum for PCMCIA DAQCards in all cases Table 1 NI Low Cost E Series Model Guide Overview and Applications NI low cost E Series multifunction data acquisition devices provide full functionality at a price to meet the needs of the budget conscious user They are ideal for applications ranging from continuous high speed data logging to control applications to high voltage signal or sensor measurements when used with NI signal conditioning Synchronize the operations of multiple devices using the RTSI bus or PXI trigger bus to easily integrate other hardware such as motion control and machine vision to create an entire measurement and control system Highly Accurate Hardware Design NI Low Cost E Series DAQ devices include the following features and technologies Temperature Drift Protection Circuitry Designed with components that minimize the effect of temperature changes on measurements to less than 0 0010 of reading per C Resolution Improvement Technologies Carefully designed noise floor maximizes the resolution Onboard Self Calibration Precise voltage reference included for calibration and measurement accuracy Self calibration is completely software controlled with no potentiometers to adjust NI DAQ STC Timing and control ASIC designed to provide more flexibility
156. e computer National Instruments is not liable for any damages resulting from such signal connections external control over the timing of your device is routed through the 10 programmable function inputs labeled PFI lt 0 9 gt These signals are explained in detail in the Programmable Function Input Connections section These PFIs are bidirectional as outputs they are not programmable and reflect the state of many DAQ waveform generation and general purpose timing signals There are five other dedicated outputs for the remainder of the timing signals As inputs the PFI signals are programmable and can control any DAQ waveform generation and general purpose timing signals The DAQ signals are explained in the DAQ Timing Connections section the waveform generation signals in the Waveform Generation Timing Connections section and the general purpose timing signals in the General Purpose Timing Signal Connections section digital timing connections are referenced to DGND This reference is demonstrated in Figure 4 16 which shows how to connect an external TRIGI source and an external CONVERT source to two PFI pins 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual 4 30 ni com Chapter 4 Signal Connections PFIO TRIG1 PFIZ CONVERT TRIG1 Source CONVERT Source DGND gt v Connector Figure 4 16 Timing 1 0 Connect
157. e computer and the connected equipment What are the power on states of the PFI and DIO lines on the I O connector At system power on and reset both the PFI and DIO lines are set to high impedance by the hardware This means that the device circuitry is not actively driving the output either high or low However these lines can have pull up or pull down resistors connected to them as shown in Table 4 3 Signal Summary These resistors weakly pull the output to either a logic high or logic low state For example DIO 0 is in the high impedance state 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual C 4 ni com Appendix Common Questions after power on and Table 4 3 Signal Summary shows that there is a 50 pull up resistor This pull up resistor sets the DIO 0 pin to a logic high when the output is in a high impedance state National Instruments Corporation C 5 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Technical Support Resources Web Support National Instruments Web support is your first stop for help in solving installation configuration and application problems and questions Online problem solving and diagnostic resources include frequently asked questions knowledge bases product specific troubleshooting wizards manuals drivers software updates and more Web support is available through the Technical Support section of ni com NI Developer Zone The NI Developer Zone at ni com zone is the essential resource for buildi
158. e signal local ground reference to the negative input of the PGIA The ground point of the signal therefore connects to the AISENSE pin Any potential difference between the device ground and the signal ground appears as a common mode signal at both the positive and negative inputs of the PGIA and this difference is rejected by the amplifier If the input circuitry of a device were referenced to ground in this situation as in the RSE input configuration this difference in ground potentials appears as an error in the measured voltage 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual 4 18 ni com Figure 4 8 shows how to connect a grounded signal source to a channel configured for NRSE mode Chapter 4 Signal Connections Ground Referenced Signal Source Common Mode Noise and Ground lt 0 15 gt So Instrumentation Amplifier Input Multiplexers Measured Potential JOP Connector Voltage f E Selected Channel in NRSE Configuration AISENSE D Figure 4 8 Single Ended Input Connections for Ground Referenced Signals Common Mode Signal Rejection Considerations Figures 4 5 and 4 8 show connections for signal sources that are already referenced to some ground point with respect to the device In these cases the PGIA can reject any voltage caused by ground potential differences between the signal source a
159. eam is level check it by direct measurement using a tape measure or by spirit level Assemble the test accessories in the load frame using rapid travel switch AX to adjust the distance between the cross beam and the platen Set the digital thumbwheel switch to the required speed To start the test press the up A button The correct operation and platen direction will then be indicated by the green flashing light inside the switch The platen speed may be altered at any time during the test Once the test has been completed the direction of platen travel may simply be reversed by pressing the stop button followed by the down button or rapid down button If the supply voltage power to the machine is switched off duringa test the machine may unload itself If correct operation of the TRITECH 50 does not occur check through each stage from power up using the fault diagnosis chart Appendix i 6 COMPUTER FUNCTIONS FUNCTION COMMAND ASCII STOP 0 UP 1 DOWN 2 NEW SPEED 7 The New Speed command should be followed by a six digit speed value For example to select 5 00000 mm min send ASCII 7 Command for new speed and then 500000 To select any of the TRITECH 50 functions above the user must send the appropriate ASCII commands via the serial port of a computer The data must be of 8 bit no parity and stop bit and it must also be sent at a rate of 9600 bits per second BAUD RATE T MAINTENANCE WARNING T
160. econdaire contre la surcharge aux court circuits permanent la marche vide contre la surtemperature contre aliment en retour Fusible protect d entr e interne Classe de protection Tension basse de S curit Indications de s curit observer Installation et fonctionnement limitation de Voy max 18 V max 30 V T3A15 250V HBC IEC127 borne L EN 60950 SELV EN 60950 VDE 0100 Part 410 PELV Remarques Suite voir Fig 2 d Condition Installation en direction standard voir illustration a droite et ACin pour des conditions differentes EN 50178 e Respecter derating Fig 2 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax Figure 4 6 WF GeoDaq terminal box spare parts all transducers while eight 8 panel sockets are firmly screwed on side of the terminal box Looking from the lower part of the terminal box up to the upper part the internal submersible load cell STALC3 24937 50kN the external load cell DBBSE A2242 50kN the axial displacement transducer LSC HS50 9021 the WF Automatic Volume Change Appa ratus WF17044 LSC HS25 9016 the cell pressure transducer Port1 RS 249 S086219 the pore pressure transducer at the pedestal Port2 2200AGB1001A2UA 003 the cell pressure transducer Port3 2200AGB1001 A2UA003 and the pore pressure transducer at the top cap Port4 RS Type 249 T023096 are mounted Taking a
161. ed to share timing and control signals between multiple devices to synchronize operations RSE Mode In addition to differential and nonreferenced single ended modes NI low cost E Series devices offer referenced single ended RSE mode for use with floating signal sources in applications with channel counts higher than eight Onboard Temperature Sensor Included for monitoring the operating temperature of the device to ensure that it is operating within the specified range High Performance Easy to Use Driver Software NI DAQ is the robust driver software that makes it easy to access the functionality of your data acquisition hardware whether you are a beginning or advanced user Helpful features include Automatic Code Generation The DAQ Assistant is an interactive guide that steps you through configuring testing and programming measurement tasks and generates the necessary code automatically for LabVIEW LabWindows CVI or Measurement Studio Cleaner Code Development Basic and advanced software functions have been combined into one easy to use yet powerful set to help you build cleaner code and move from basic to advanced applications without replacing functions High Performance Driver Engine Software timed single point input typically used in control loops with NI DAQ achieves rates of up to 50 kHz NI DAQ also delivers maximum I O system throughput with a multithreaded driver Test Panels With NI DAQ
162. el caso Ci riserviamo il diritto di appor tare modifiche tecniche Z Le istruzioni in italiano sono riportate partire pagina 11 Le rispettive figure sono riportate a partire pagina 1 Aviso Esse manual cont m instruc es gerais sobre sua nova fonte de alimenta el trica e juntamente com o anexo Dados t cnicos descreve a sua i instala o e opera o Em caso de diverg ncias prevalecem as infor 3 do anexo Dados t cnicos Quando houver diferen as entre os idiomas DIN Rail Power Supplies prevalece a vers o em alem o Em caso de erros e d vidas dirija se ou ao seu Deutsch Installation und Betrieb 1 fornecedor Reservamo nos o direito de efetuar altera es t cnicas AN z As instru es em alem o s o encontradas a partir da p gina 13 EJ Engish Installation and Operation As ilustra es correspondentes encontram se a partir p gina 1 Francais Installation et fonctionnement Espafiol Instalaci n y funcion amiento 1 Italiano Installazione e funzionamento Portugu s Instala o e opera o i EEE ITNT qe s PU 327 015 00 10D 01 2003 A Notes on Safety Fig 1 Installation Read Before working with this unit read these instructions Admissible area of This unit is a primary switched mode power supply unit for use
163. er for time related functions The DAQ STC consists of three timing groups that control analog input analog output and general purpose counter timer functions These groups include a total of seven 24 bit and three 16 bit counters and a maximum timing resolution of 50 ns The DAQ STC makes possible such applications as buffered pulse generation equivalent time sampling and seamless changing of the sampling rate PCI 6023E PCI 6024E PCI 6025E and PXI 6025E only With many DAQ devices you cannot easily synchronize several measurement functions to a common trigger or timing event These devices have the Real Time System Integration RTSI bus to solve this problem In a PCI system the RTSI bus consists of the National Instruments RTSI bus interface and a ribbon cable to route timing and trigger signals between several functions on as many as five DAQ devices in your computer In a PXI system the RTSI bus consists of the National Instruments RTSI bus interface and the PXI trigger signals on the PXI backplane to route timing and trigger signals between several functions on as many as seven DAQ devices in your system National Instruments Corporation 1 1 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Using PXI with These devices can interface to an SCXI system the instrumentation front end for plug in devices so that you can acquire analog signals from thermocouples RTDs strain gauges voltage sources and curren
164. erature Humidity Table 3 1 LSC HS25 9016 Calibration Table the dial gauge should be connected to the appropriate readout device which should be switched on at least 12 hours before attempting the calibration The LSC HS25 9016 used the displacement gauge of the apparatus has a maximum spindle of 25 8mm and its volt sensitivity 5 21V excitation voltage is 6 5mV V Calibration 1994 11 04 WF Figures 3 3 3 4 and 3 5 show the reference manual and calibration sheets of the above mentioned displacement transducer Table 3 1 summarises the calibration constants The wiring connection of the transducer consists of a shielded four cable wire which ends to a 5 pin socket plug 240 The wiring connection of the displacement transducer follows the below mentioned cabling excitation voltage red excitation voltage yellow output voltage green output voltage blue and ground shield 36 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax WYKEHAM FARRANCE ENGINEERING LIMITED CALIBRATION REPORT pate D 2e TRANSDUCER TYPE INPUT RED YELLOW SERIAL NO a OUTPUT BLUE GREEN 100 Frequency Response Shunt Balance 5 2 Frequency Hr 25 50 150 250 v EXCITATION VOLTS OR DC BRIDGE 350 ohms NOMINAL 1 5 10 CONSTANT SHUNT 100k ohms NOMINAL 25 max pulsed CALIBRATION DATA GAUGE FACTOR SET 2 0 TEST VOLTS 5 21 VDC TEMPERATURE 20 C FS SPINDLE DISPLACEMENT Z amp K NON LINEARITY
165. ernally mounted at the upper part of the cell This is a LSC HS50 9021 displacement transducer measuring the axial deformation of the specimen Table 2 5 summarises the main specifications and calibration constants of this transducer The wiring connection of the transducer consists of a shielded four cable wire which ends to a 5 pin socket plug 240 The wiring connection of the displacement transducer follows the below mentioned cabling excitation voltage red excitation voltage yellow output voltage green output voltage blue and ground shield 20 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax Figure 2 19 De airing valve on top of WF triaxial cell and strain arm post Operator GIO GIO Place GeoLab GeoLab Date 2004 06 01 2004 07 10 Time 16 00 16 50 Maximum spindle 51 62mm Calibration constant 1 406mm mV 1 414mm mV Linearity 99 998 99 998 Excitation voltage 10 00Volts 10 11 Volts Voltage Sensitivity 3 54mV V 3 59mV V Sampling rate 1 000samples sec 1 000samples sec Temperature 30 90 Humidity 29 Table 2 5 LSC HS50 9021 Specifications Calibration Table 21 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax WYKEHAM FARRANCE ENGINEERING LIMITED CALIBRATION REPORT TRANSDUCER TYPE HS 50 INPUT RED YELLOW SERIAL FOAL OUTPUT BLUE GREEN Frequency Response Shunt Balance 5 gt Frequency Ha 25 se 150 250 gt v EXCITATION VOLTS AC OR DC BRIDGE 350 ohms NOMINAL 1
166. ese load cells is to use the WF14450 dead weight calibrating frame Detailed instructions for Calibrating load cells with the dead weight are supplied with the device The following instructions apply to those organisations that do not possess a suitable dead weight calibrator In the absence of a calibrating frame the load cell may be calibrated using a load ring and 50kN stepless triaxial compression machine In one of two 1 The Load Cei should he connected to the readout unit and ailowed to warm up for Z4 hours 2 steel block 1 substituted for sample in the triaxial cell 3 With the load cell under conditions of zero load the readout device which may he a 17135 data acquisition system WF18000 series interface or other suitable instrument is adjusted to read the channel allocated to the load cell being calibrated Using the zero adjustment screw control zero pot the data is adjusted to read zero 4 It is very important that the load applied has been calculated correctly using the load ring calibration figures that the exact correct number of divisions of load ring movement are applied 5 The load on the load cell is then slowly increased to the rated maximum for the particular ioad cell it is of course of vital importance that the correct load is applied at this stage we therefore strongly advise that the CAPACITY of the load 11 is checked 6 When the maximum load is reached the c
167. esented 4 1 The terminal box The terminal box can be considered as a robust and of practical use node between the transducers and the analog digital input output card installed in the computer l he main purpose of the terminal box is twofold On the one hand it serves as a board where the cable plugs of the transducers are connected with their respective panel sockets while on the other hand it is used to provide the excitation voltage and receive the output voltage from the transducers In Figures 4 2 and 4 3 external and internal view of the terminal box are given while the basic instructions for the mounting of the terminal box itself are shown in Figures 4 4 and 4 5 A 5 pin 240 pole type cable plug circular DIN connector is used for 41 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax Figure 4 3 Internal view of WF GeoDaq terminal box 42 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax 1 Figure 4 4 Instructions for mounting the terminal box The Handbook of WF GeoTriax Figure 4 5 Instructions for mounting the terminal box 2 Hinweis Dieses enthalt allgemeine Informationen zu Ihrer neuen Stromversor j gung und beschreibt zusammen mit dem Beiblatt Technische Daten die und den Betrieb Bei Abweichungen haben die Angaben im Beiblatt Technische Daten stets Vorrang bei sprachlichen Widerspr chen gilt die deutsche Version Bei Ir
168. essure transducer to the triaxial cell or hydraulic CRSC oedometers Note WF 17029 is not required where the transducer is screwed directly into the apparatus CONNECTION OF WF17029 AND PRESSURE TRANSDUCER The pressure transducer must be carefully screwed into the de airing block make sure that the sealing washer is in place The transducer should be gently tightened into place using a spanner on the spanner flats provided guru PORC j Connection should now be screwed onto either pore pressure valve or the cell pressure valve depending on which pressure is to be measured In the case of hydraulic oedometer or C R S C oedometers the WF 17029 and transducer should be connected to the appropriate valves on the apparatus The pressure transducer should be positioned so that it points down Either the appropriate pressure line or a de airing line should be connected to the valve of the de airing block DE AIRING THE WF17029 AND TRANSDUCER The valve on the triaxial cell or oedometer apparatus should be closed De aired water should be connected to the valve Carefully remove bleed nut and open valve to allow water to displace the air When all the air has been removed replace bleed nut The valve of the de airing block must open when bleed nut is tightened Now open the valve on the triaxial cell base or oedometer apparatus and allow de aired water to flow through until all the air in WF17029 and cell base has been rem
169. eving this while maintaining a high common mode rejection ratio CMRR These methods are outlined in Chapter 4 Signal Connections I m using the DACs to generate a waveform but I discovered with a digital oscilloscope that there are glitches on the output signal Is this normal When it switches from one voltage to another any DAC produces glitches due to released charges The largest glitches occur when the most significant bit MSB of the D A code switches You can build a lowpass 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual C 2 ni com Appendix Common Questions deglitching filter to remove some of these glitches depending on the frequency and nature of your output signal Can I synchronize a one channel analog input data acquisition with a one channel analog output waveform generation on my PCI E Series device Yes One way to accomplish this is to use the waveform generation timing pulses to control the analog input data acquisition To do this follow steps 1 through 4 below in addition to the usual steps for data acquisition and waveform generation configuration 1 Enable the PFI5 line for output as follows e If you are using NI DAQ call Select Signal deviceNumber ND PFI 5 ND OUT UPDATE ND HIGH TO LOW e Ifyou are using LabVIEW invoke the Route Signal VI with the signal name set to PFI5 and the signal source set to AO Update 2 Setup data acquisition timing so that the timing signal for A D conversion comes from PFIS
170. f Wykeham Farrance 50kN triaxial frame WF10056 SN 100175 7 displacement rate upwards direction 6 2 1 Wykeham Farrance WF11001 SN 100257 9 triaxial cell 8 2 2 Side and top view of Wykeham Farrance WF11001 SN 100257 s sad Ser bse 8 2 3 Wykeham base plate WF11001 SN 100257 9 9 2 4 Top and side view of Wykeham Farrance base plate WF 11001 SN 100257 vL 10 2 5 Gell pressur Ime Portl 11 2 6 RS Type 249 S086219 Cell Pressure Port1 Calibration 2004 sts o iX BACON SE OUS 12 2 7 RS Type 249 5086219 Pressure Port1 Calibration 2004 T1523 Sete Nue bo I eS 12 2 8 Pore pressure line 12 18 2 9 2200AGB1001A2UA003 Pore Pressure Port2 Calibration 2004 fe E lacie ee eh 14 2 10 2200AGB1001A2UA003 Pore Pressure Port2 Calibration 2004 14 2 11 Cell pressure line 3 16 2 12 2200AGB1001A2UA003 Cell Pressure Port3 Calibration 2004 arc Dry ce ee E ote Ge Rok we AO De en MM 16 2 13 2200AGB1001A2UA003 Cell Pressure Port3 Calibration 2004 1123 a Rue o ee MA 17 iii iv 2 14 2 15 2 16 2 17 2 18 2 19 2 20 2 22 2 23 2 24 2 25 2 26 2 27 2 28 2 29 2 30 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 LIST OF FIGURES Pore pressure line Port4
171. f calibration is not very accurate because it does not take into account the fact that the device measurement and output voltage errors can vary with time and temperature It is better to self calibrate the device when it is installed in the environment in which it will be used Your device can measure and correct for almost all of its calibration related errors without any external signal connections Your National Instruments software provides a self calibration method This self calibration process which generally takes less than a minute is the preferred method of assuring accuracy in your application Initiate self calibration to minimize the effects of any offset gain and linearity drifts particularly those due to warmup Immediately after self calibration the only significant residual calibration error could be gain error due to time or temperature drift of the onboard voltage reference This error is addressed by external calibration which is discussed in the following section If you are interested primarily in relative measurements you can ignore a small amount of gain error and self calibration should be sufficient External Calibration 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Your device has an onboard calibration reference to ensure the accuracy of self calibration Its specifications are listed in Appendix A Specifications The reference voltage is measured at the factory and stored in the EEPROM for subsequent self calibrati
172. f directly connecting the negative line to AIGND connect it to AIGND through a resistor that is about 100 times the equivalent source impedance The resistor puts the signal path nearly in balance so that about the same amount of noise couples onto both connections yielding better rejection of electrostatically coupled noise Also this configuration does not load down the source other than the very high input impedance of the You can fully balance the signal path by connecting another resistor of the same value between the positive input and AIGND as shown in Figure 4 6 This fully balanced configuration offers slightly better noise rejection but has the disadvantage of loading the source down with the series combination sum of the two resistors If for example the source impedance is 2 kQ and each of the two resistors is 100 kQ the resistors load down the source with 200 and produce 1 gain error Both inputs of the PGIA require a DC path to ground in order for the PGIA to work If the source is AC coupled capacitively coupled the PGIA needs a resistor between the positive input and AIGND If the source has low impedance choose a resistor that is large enough not to significantly load the source but small enough not to produce significant input offset voltage as a result of input bias current typically 100 to 1 MQ In this case you can tie the negative input directly to AIGND If the source has high output
173. fference is amplified the two terminal input to a differential amplifier digital input output the addition of Gaussian noise to an analog input signal direct memory access a method by which data can be transferred to from computer memory from to a device or memory on the bus while the processor does something else DMA is the fastest method of transferring data to from computer memory differential nonlinearity a measure in LSB of the worst case deviation of code widths from their ideal value of 1 LSB digital output software that controls a specific hardware device such as a DAQ device electrically erasable programmable read only memory ROM that can be erased with an electrical signal and reprogrammed Some SCXI modules contain an EEPROM to store measurement correction coefficients G 4 ni com electrostatically coupled EXTSTROBE F FIFO floating signal sources FREQ_OUT ft G 5 GATE glitch GPCTR GPCTRO_GATE GPCTRO_OUT GPCTRO_SOURCE GPCTRO_UP_DOWN GPCTR1_GATE GPCTR1_OUT GPCTR1_SOURCE Glossary propagating a signal by means of a varying electric field external strobe signal first in first out memory buffer signal sources with voltage signals that are not connected to an absolute reference or system ground Also called nonreferenced signal sources Some common example of floating signal sources are batteries transformers or thermocouples frequency output signal feet gr
174. frequency scaler Resolution Counter timers 24 bits Frequency scalers 4 bits Compatibility eene TTL CMOS Base clocks available Counter timers 20 MHz 100 kHz Frequency scalers 10 MHz 100 kHz Base clock 0 01 Max source 20 MHz Min source pulse duration 10 ns in edge detect mode Min gate pulse duration 10 ns in edge detect mode Data transf ts ease etes DMA interrupts programmed I O DMA modes intente Scatter gather single transfer demand transfer 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual A 8 ni com Appendix A Specifications for PCI and PXI Buses Triggers Digital Trigger Compatibility TTL RESPONSE Rising or falling edge Pulse 10 ns min RTSI Trigger 7 Calibration Recommended warm up time 15 min Interval year External calibration reference gt lt 10 V Onboard calibration reference 5 000 V 3 5 mV actual value stored in EEPROM Temperature coefficient 5 ppm C max Long term stability 15 ppm 1 000 h Power Requirement 5 VDC 546 0 7 A 5 Note
175. g mV Accuracy Resolution mV Temp at Full Positive Negative Offset Drift Scale FS FS 24 Hours 1 Year mV Single Pt Averaged mV Single Pt Averaged 10 10 0 0872 0 0914 6 38 3 91 0 975 0 0010 16 504 5 89 1 28 5 5 0 0272 0 0314 3 20 1 95 0 488 0 0005 5 263 2 95 0 642 0 5 0 5 0 0872 0 0914 0 340 0 195 0 049 0 0010 0 846 0 295 0 064 0 05 0 05 0 0872 0 0914 0 054 0 063 0 006 0 0010 0 106 0 073 0 008 Note Accuracies are valid for measurements following an internal Series calibration Averaged numbers assume dithering and averaging of 100 single channel readings Measurement accuracies are listed for operational temperatures within 1 C of internal calibration temperature and 10 C of external or factory calibration temperature One year calibration interval recommended The Absolute Accuracy at Full Scale calculations were performed for a maximum range input voltage for example 10 V for the 10 V range after one year assuming 100 pt averaging of data 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual A 2 ni com Appendix A Specifications for PCI and PXI Buses Transfer Characteristics Relative accuracy x 0 5 LSB typ dithered 1 5 LSB max undithered DN aii thas Rie 0 5 LSB typ 1 0 LSB max No missing 12 bits guaranteed Offset error Pregain error after calibration 12 uV max Pregain error before calibration 28 mV max Postgain error after calibr
176. g Connect to Cable Cable Leg Adapter Accessory PCI PXI Shielded Screw terminals SH100100 SCB 100 Shielded Screw terminals 1006868 68 Shielded 591006868 Extended SCB 68 Shielded Screw terminals SH1006868 TBX 68 CB 68LP CB 68LPR signal accessory Shielded Screw terminals 1006868 Extended TBX 68 CB 68LP CB 68LPR Shielded BNC terminal block SH1006868 MIO BNC 2110 BNC 2120 BNC 2090 Shielded 591006868 Extended BNC 2115 Shielded 50 pin connectors SH1006868 68 50 MIO Custom 3rd party Shielded SH1006868 Extended 68M 50F Extended Custom or 3rd party Unshielded 50 pin connector R1005050 MIO Custom or 3rd party Unshielded R1005050 Extended Custom or 3rd party Shielded cable with unshielded accessories Table 2 Cable Connection Specifications for 64 Channel E Series Devices and the NI 6025E National Instruments Tel 800 433 3488 info ni com ni com 12 NI Services and Support NI has the services and support to meet your needs around the globe and through the application life cycle from planning and development through deployment and ongoing maintenance We offer services and service levels to meet customer requirements in research design validation and manufacturing Visit ni com services Training and Certification NI training is the fastest most certain route to productivity with our products NI training can sho
177. gdel c ec ce eee 0 5 to V 0 5 V Calibration Recommended warm up time 15 minutes 30 minutes for DAQCard and DAQPad Calibration 1 year Onboard calibration reference en nent 5 000 V 3 5 mV over full operating temperature actual value stored in EEPROM emperature coefficient 5 ppm C maximum Long term stability 15 ppm y 1000 h National Instruments Tel 800 433 3488 info ni com ni com 9 12 Bit E Series Multifunction Specifications Specifications NI 607xE NI 606xE NI 6040E NI 602xE continued RTSI Bus PCI and FireWire only Trigger lines PCI m FireWire DAQPad 4 Trigger Bus PXI only IBS ao 6 MG QE 1 Bus Interface PCI PXI FireWire DAQPad Master slave USB DAQPad Slave PCMCIA DAQCard Slave Power Requirements Device 5 VDC 5 Power Available at 1 0 Connector PCI 607xE 607 11A 4 65 to 45 25 VDC 6040E 10A 4 65 to 45 25 VDC DAQCard 6062E 340 mA typical 4 65 to 45 25 VDC 250 mA 750 mA maximum 270 mA typical 750 mA maximum DAQCard 6024E 4 65 to 45 25 VDC 250 mA 6023E 6025E 07 4 65 to 5 25 VDC 1A PCI 6024E Device Power Power Available at 1 0 Connector DAQPad 6020E DAQPad 6070E 15 W
178. ge that is always positive for example 0 to 10 V update interval counter clock signal 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Glossary update update rate VDC VI 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual the output equivalent of a scan One or more analog or digital output samples Typically the number of output samples in an update is equal to the number of channels in the output group For example one pulse from the update clock produces one update which sends one new sample to every analog output channel in the group the number of output updates per second volts positive supply voltage volts direct current virtual instrument 1 a combination of hardware and or software elements typically used with a PC that has the functionality of a classic stand alone instrument 2 a LabVIEW software module VI which consists of a front panel user interface and a block diagram program volts input high volts input low volts in measured voltage volts output high volts output low reference voltage volts root mean square G 12 ni com Glossary W waveform multiple voltage readings taken at a specific sampling rate WFTRIG waveform generation trigger signal working voltage the highest voltage that should be applied to a product in normal use normally well under the breakdown voltage for safety margin See also breakdown voltage National Instruments Corporation G 13 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual In
179. hand side valve If used in this manner certain precautions are needed when calibrating the apparatus which are explained later in this manual CALIBRATION The WF17044 is easily calibrated whether using the linear strain transducer or the digital dial gauge Both devices measure from zero to full scale electrically and do not have a centre zero point Thus the user can calibrate the device from zero to 100 ml in engineering units cc The transducer and dial 1 gauge Sous be connected to the appropriate readout device which should be switched on far at for hos Allow water to flow into the volume change unit so that it moves the transducer spindle to its downwards maximum travel point The digital displacement on the readout device or the digital dial gauge must then be adjusted to read zero Reverse the water flow into the volume change apparatus using the flow valve until the maximum upward movement has been achieved The amount of water flowing into the volume change unit during this process should be measured accu rately either by allowing the flowing out water to collect in a measuring cylinder or a pre weighed beaker Knowing the original weight of the beaker the weight of displaced water can be accurately determined and thereby the volume As an alternative to this a precision burette could be used to measure the displaced water When this actual volume has been determined the dial gauge reading should be adjuste
180. hannel 01 12 bits 1 in 4 096 Maximum Sampling Rate Overvoltage Protection Device Powered On Powered Off 607xE 25 V 15V 6062E 6040E 6023E 40 V 25 V 6024E 6025E 6020E 35 V 25 Inputs Protected 6070E Al lt 0 15 gt Al SENSE 6062E 6040E 602xE 6071E lt 0 63 gt Al SENSE Al SENSE2 FIFO Buffer Size DAQCard 6062E 8 192 samples DAQPad 6020E 4 096 samples DAQPad 6070E 2 048 samples DAQCard 6024E PCI PXI 6070E 512 samples 6071E 6040E PCI 6023E NI 6025E 6024 Data transfers PCI PXI DAQPad for FireWire DAQCard DAQPad for USB DMA modes PCI PXI DAQPad for FireWire Configuration memory size DMA interrupts programmed 1 0 Interrupts programmed 1 0 Scatter gather single transfer demand transfer 512 words Transfer Characteristics Relative Accuracy Device Typical Dithered Maximum Undithered 607xE 1 25 MS s 6062 500 kS s 6040E 500 kS s single channel scanning 250 kS s multichannel scanning 6023E 200 kS s 6024E 6025E 6020E 100 kS s Input Signal Ranges Device Range Software Selectable Bipolar Input Range Unipolar Input Range 607xE 20V 10 V 6062 10V 5V Oto 10V 6040E 5V 251 01051 6020 2V V 0to2V 1V 500 mV Oto1V 500 mV 250 mV 0 to 500 mV 200 mV 100 mV 0 to 200 mV 100 mV 50 mV 0 to 100 mV 6023E 20V 10V 60
181. he computer is plugged into the same power system Non isolated outputs of instruments and devices that plug into the building power system fall into this category The difference in ground potential between two instruments connected to the same building power system is typically between 1 and 100 mV but can be much higher if power distribution circuits are not properly connected If a grounded signal source is improperly measured this difference can appear as an error in the measurement The connection instructions for grounded signal sources are designed to eliminate this ground potential difference from the measured signal Analog Input Modes You can configure your device for one of three input modes nonreferenced single ended NRSE referenced single ended RSE and differential DIFF With the different configurations you can use the PGIA in different ways Figure 4 3 shows a diagram of the PGIA of your device National Instruments Corporation 4 9 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Chapter 4 Signal Connections Programmable Gain Instrumentation Amplifier Vins Vm Measured Voltage Vm Ving Gain Figure 4 3 Programmable Gain Instrumentation Amplifier PGIA In single ended mode RSE and NRSE signals connected to ACH lt 0 15 gt are routed to the positive input of the PGIA In DIFF mode signals connected to ACH lt 0 7 gt are routed to the positive input of the
182. he unit must be switched off and disconnected from the mains power supply before dismantling the unit To ensure long life and trouble free usage it is suggested that the following procedure is adopted l Lightly oil platen surface each time the machine is used Lightly oil strain rod threads and load column ram every month The spindle and ball screw should be lubricated at six monthly intervals This is done by unscrewing the platen to expose a hole in the centre of the ram Appendix i FAULT DIAGNOSIS SYMPTON 1 NO POWER UP 2 MOTOR DOES NOT RUN 3 PLATEN MOVES BUT NO FLASHING LIGHT 4 PLATEN MOVES AT INCORRECT SPEED 5 INCORRECT COMPUTER OPERATION POSSIBLE CAUSE Supply voltage incorrect Blown fuse Power lead disconnected Stop bulb blown No supply voltage at front panel Direction not selected Platen at its limit Short circuit blows fuse Card fuse blown or green LED not lit Defective motor No pulse supply to motor Blown bulb Faulty wiring Faulty CPU card Faulty thumbwheel switch Fauity loose connection Incorrect pulsing Wrong baud rate Computer communication Wrong parity set CORRECTION Suppiy correct voltage Replace fuse Connect power lead Change bulb Switch off supply voltage Remove the front panel to inspect the inline power connector Press the up or down direction switch Reverse direction Check motor connection Change
183. ifications WF 10056 SN 100175 7 Height mm 1460 Width mm 503 Depth mm 380 Horizontal clearness 364 Vertical clearness maximum mm 1000 Vertical clearness minimum mm 335 Platen diameter mm 158 Platen travel mm 100 Weight kgr 98 Maximum power Watt 90 Table 1 1 WF10056 SN 100175 7 triaxial loading frame specifications The Handbook of WF GeoTriax Function Command ASCII STOP 0 UP 1 DOWN 2 NEW SPEED K Table 1 2 WF commands via RS232 serial port Figure 1 1 Wykeham Farrance 50kN typical triaxial loading frame photo taken from WF web site strain rate control switch two buttons for the upwards and downwards di rection up and down one stop button stop and two buttons for quick base plate adjustment fast up and fast down The current frame is also equipped with an RS232 serial port which allows the user to con trol the triaxial frame via a personal computer In order to accomplish the communication the user has to setup the serial port to 9600 bits per sec ond Baud rate data must be of 8 bit no parity flow control none and 1 stop bit Table 1 2 summarises the commands of the WF triaxial frame The new speed command should be followed by a six digit speed value For example to stop and move the base plate in an upward direction selecting a new speed of 0 5mm min the following values should be send 070500001 In the following figures photos and drawings of
184. igger lines on the RTSI bus provide a very flexible interconnection scheme for any device sharing the RTSI bus These bidirectional lines can drive any of eight timing signals onto the RTSI bus and can receive any of these timing signals This signal connection scheme is shown in Figure 3 5 for PCI devices and Figure 3 6 for PXI devices National Instruments Corporation 3 9 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual RTSI Bus Connector 5 Trigger 7 9 77 7 tr Clock switch DAQ STC TRIG1 TRIG2 CONVERT UPDATE WFTRIG GPCTRO SOURCE GPCTRO GATE GPCTRO OUT STARTSCAN AIGATE SISOURCE UISOURCE GPCTR1 SOURCE GPCTR1_GATE RTSI_OSC 20 MHz Figure 3 5 PCI Bus Signal Connection ni com Chapter 3 Hardware Overview Bus Connector Z PXI Star 6 PXI Trigger 0 5 PXI Trigger 7 switch lt TRIGI lt TRIG2 4 CONVERT lt lt WFTRIG 4 gt GPCTRO SOURCE amp RTSI Switch 4 STARTSCAN AIGATE I SISOURCE gt GPCTR1 GATE DAQ STC UPDATE GPCTRO OUT UISOURCE GPCTR1 SOURCE RTSI_OSC 20 MHz Figure 3 6 PXI RTSI Bus Signal Connection Table 3 3 lists the name and number of pins used by the PX
185. iguration DACOOUT AOGND Output Analog channel 0 output this pin supplies the voltage output of analog output channel 0 DACIOUT AOGND Output Analog channel 1 output this pin supplies the voltage output of analog output channel 1 AOGND Analog output ground the analog output voltages are referenced to this node three ground references AIGND AOGND and DGND are connected together on your device DGND Digital ground this pin supplies the reference for the digital signals at the I O connector as well as the 5 VDC supply All three ground references AIGND AOGND and DGND are connected on your device DIO lt 0 7 gt DGND Input or Output Digital I O signals DIO6 and 7 can control the up down signal of general purpose counters and 1 respectively lt 0 7 gt 2 DGND Input or Output Port A bidirectional digital data lines for the 82C55A programmable peripheral interface on the 6025E PA7 is the MSB PAO is the LSB lt 0 7 gt 2 DGND Input or Output Port B bidirectional digital data lines for 82C55A programmable peripheral interface on the 6025E PB7 is the MSB PBO is the LSB lt 0 7 gt 2 DGND Input or Output Port C bidirectional digital data lines for 82C55A programmable peripheral interface on the 6025E PC7 is the MSB PCO is the LSB 5 DGND Output 5 VDC Source
186. imate its behavior under isotropic cell pressure Figure 2 18 mm 2 0 03 0 2 1 where 3940mm 31 2mm kPa and 8 8kPa In the upper part of the chamber a de airing valve allows the user to extract air trapped in the upper part of the chamber Such de airing valve 19 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax WF Triaxial Cell Expansion Model No 11001 SN 100257 9 1 400 Veet mm c In o3 05 05 05 4205 c mm 3 940 IH c mm kPa 31 2 Model Curve 1 000 2005 03 15 a T 2005 03 15 b o 800 5 a 600 3 o 400 200 4 0 10 000 20 000 30 000 40 000 50 000 60 000 70 000 Cell Expansion mm Figure 2 18 Calibration of WF11001 SN 100257 9 triaxial cell under isotropic pressure may prove to be of great importance in case when the cell must be fully filled with water and no air is allowed to stay in the cell i e calibration of cell measurement of volume change A mounting block strain arm post may also be installed on the upper part of the cell in case the axial displacement of the specimen is externally measured see Figure 2 19 A displacement transducer may be mounted either on the loading piston or on the vertical rods of the frame while its spindle comes into contact with the upper part of the cell Due to the lack of space for on sample transducers inside the chamber a displacement transducer is ext
187. ing in compliance with EMC directive and low voltage directive Notes a unless specified otherwise on the unit unit is delivered with jumper preset 12 V 0 5 b 200 kHz bandwidth 500 measurement 2mVpp 20 MHz bandwidth 500 measurement 10mV See supplementary sheet Installation and Operation for further details d At standard mounting position cf figure at the right and ACin other conditions see Fig 2 Observe derating Fig 2 Protect from moisture and condensation Rated Voltage Vout Adjustment limits 10 12 min 10 V 0 5 Preset without jumper 12 V 0 5 with jumper Accuracy of stat lt 1 G9 Vo 10V regulation stat 1 22 12V dyn 22 5 Ripple lt 2 mVpp Noise Spikes 10 mVpp Permissible Load li up to 3 A 10 V up to 2 5 A 12 V Tamp 10 C 60 C 45 C depending on mounting position Vin see Fig 1 and Fig 2 for details Current limitation typ 3 2A 100 120V AC typ 3 5 A 230 AC see curve in Fig 1 Continuous operation without unit shutdown see Fig 2 Characteristic curve see Fig 1 Parallel operation possible no equal load sharing Overload Short circuit characteristic Derating Tension d entr e Vi Valeur nominale 100 240 V AC Fr quence 47 63 Hz AC permanent 85 264 V AC DC permanent 85 375 V DC Courant d entr e lin Valeur nominale
188. ion Results 25591 Transducer Type DBBSE 50kN Serial No A2242 Load Rating 50kN Proof Rating 75kN Zero Output 0 037mV 10Vdc Full Scale Output 2 041mV V Non Linearity 0 02 FS Hysteresis 0 01 FS Supply 10Vdc Insulation Resistance gt 1000 megohms at 100Vdc Electrical Connections Red ve supply Blue ve supply Green output Yellow ve output Director PETER LEWIS Applied Measurements Limited hereby certifies that the above items have been RE inspected tested and calibrated in all respects with the requirements of the customer s order Reg No 2583968 NI t Stainless Steel Fully Welded 5 Beam Tension and Compression LOAD CELL Capacities 10 to 20 000kg Sealed to IP68 High Accuracy Fully Welded Stainless Steel from 250kg Robust Construction High Side Load Resistance Simple Installation 3 YEAR WARRANTY Options Available Different Cable Lengths Cable Conduit Fitting Full range of mounting options available including Shock Anti Vibration mounting assembly Load Button Spherical rod end bearings DESCRIPTION The DBBSE series S beam load cell is designed for force measurement and weighing applications alike It s ease of mounting makes it very attractive for use as a general purpose load cell and is equally suited for laboratory and harsh environments due to it s fully welded stainless steel construction
189. ion refers to them as handshaking and no handshaking Table 4 4 Port C Signal Assignments Configuration Terminology Signal Assignments 6023E National 6024E 6025E Instruments User Manual Software PC7 PC6 PCS 4 2 1 PCO Mode 0 No vO VO IO Lo Lo IO IO Lo Basic I O Handshaking Mode 1 Handshaking Lo VO IBFA STBA INTRA 5 Strobed Input Mode 1 Handshaking OBF ACK vO yo INTRA INTRg Strobed Output Mode 2 Handshaking OBFA ACKA IBFA STBA INTRA IO T O Bidirectional Bus Indicates that the signal is active low Subscripts A and B denote port A or port B handshaking signals National Instruments Corporation 4 23 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Chapter 4 Signal Connections Power up State 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual 6025E only The 6025E contains bias resistors that control the state of the digital I O lines PA lt 0 7 gt PB lt 0 7 gt PC lt 0 7 gt at power up Each digital line is configured as an input pulled high by a 100 KQ bias resistor You can change individual lines from pulled up to pulled down by adding your own external resistors This section describes the procedure Changing DIO Power up State to Pulled Low Each DIO line is pulled to approximately 5 VDC with 100 resistor To pull a specific line low connect between that line and groun
190. ions Programmable Function Input Connections There are a total of 13 internal timing signals that you can externally control from the PFI pins The source for each of these signals is software selectable from any of the PFIs when you want external control This flexible routing scheme reduces the need to change the physical wiring to the device I O connector for different applications requiring alternative wiring You can individually enable each of the PFI pins to output a specific internal timing signal For example if you need the CONVERT signal as an output on the I O connector software can turn on the output driver for PFI2 CONVERT pin Be careful not to drive PFI signal externally when it is configured as an output As an input you can individually configure each PFI pin for edge or level detection and for polarity selection as well You can use the polarity selection for any of the 13 timing signals but the edge or level detection National Instruments Corporation 4 31 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Chapter 4 Signal Connections depends upon the particular timing signal you are controlling The detection requirements for each timing signal are listed within the section that discusses that individual signal In edge detection mode the minimum pulse width required is 10 ns This applies for both rising edge and falling edge polarity settings There is no maximum pulse width requirement in edge detect mode In
191. is case the external signal supplies its own reference ground point and the device should not supply one In single ended configurations more electrostatic and magnetic noise couples into the signal connections than in DIFF configurations The coupling is the result of differences in the signal path Magnetic coupling is proportional to the area between the two signal conductors Electrical coupling is a function of how much the electric field differs between the two conductors National Instruments Corporation 4 17 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Chapter 4 Signal Connections Single Ended Connections for Floating Signal Sources RSE Configuration Figure 4 7 shows how to connect a floating signal source to a channel configured for RSE mode I ACH 2 Programmable Gain t Instrumentation Amplifier Floating Signal Source E o Input Multiplexers 9 AISENSE Measured m Voltage lt Connector AIGND Selected Channel RSE Configuration Figure 4 7 Single Ended Input Connections for Nonreferenced or Floating Signals Single Ended Connections for Grounded Signal Sources NRSE Configuration To measure a grounded signal source with a single ended configuration you must configure your device in the NRSE input configuration Connect the signal to the positive input of the PGIA and connect th
192. is is the WFTRIG AO Start Trigger signal In timed analog output sequences a low to high transition indicates the initiation of the waveform generation PFI7 STARTSCAN DGND Input PFI7 Start of Scan as an input this is one of the PFIs Output As an output this is the STARTSCAN AI Scan Start signal This pin pulses once at the start of each analog input scan in the interval scan A low to high transition indicates the start of the scan PFIS GPCTRO SOURCE DGND Input PFI8 Counter 0 Source as an input this is one of the As an output this is GPCTRO_SOURCE signal This signal reflects the actual source connected to the general purpose counter 0 PFI9 GPCTRO_GATE DGND Input PFI9 Counter 0 Gate as an input this is one of the PFIs Output As an output this is the GPCTRO_GATE signal This signal reflects the actual gate signal connected to the general purpose counter 0 GPCTRO OUT DGND Output Counter 0 Output this output is from the general purpose counter 0 output FREQ OUT DGND Output Frequency Output this output is from the frequency generator output Indicates that the signal is active low Not available on the 6023E Not available on the 6023E or 6024E 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual 4 6 ni com Chapter 4 Signal Connections Table 4 3 shows the I O signal summary for the 6023E 6024E and 6025E Table 4 3 1 0 Signal Summary
193. ist National Instruments reserves the right to make changes to subsequent editions of this document without prior notice to holders of this edition The reader should consult National Instruments if errors are suspected In no event shall National Instruments be liable for any damages arising out of or related to this document or the information contained in it EXCEPT AS SPECIFIED HEREIN NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS MAKES NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE CUSTOMER S RIGHT TO RECOVER DAMAGES CAUSED BY FAULT OR NEGLIGENCE ON THE PART OF NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT THERETOFORE PAID BY THE CUSTOMER NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES RESULTING FROM LOSS OF DATA PROFITS USE OF PRODUCTS OR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY THEREOF This limitation of the liability of National Instruments will apply regardless of the form of action whether in contract or tort including negligence Any action against National Instruments must be brought within one year after the cause of action accrues National Instruments shall not be liable for any delay in performance due to causes beyond its reasonable control The warranty provided herein does not cover damages defects malfunctions or service failures caused by owner s failure to follow the National Instruments installation operation or maintenan
194. justem min Pr s lectionn e Pr cision du r glage Ondulation residuelle Bruit transitoires Charge autoris e lout plus de d tails Limitation de courant Comportement en cas de surcharge court circuit Derating uniforme de la charge C bles souples C bles rigides Degainage en bout du c ble 10 12 10 V 0 5 sans jumper 12 V 0 5 avec jumper stat 1 Vou 10V stat lt 1 2 Vout12V dyn 2 5 Vout lt 2 lt 10 mVpp jusqu a 10 V jusqu a 2 5 A 12 V Tamb 10 C 60 C d pendant de la direction de montage Vin Tamp voir Fig 1 et Fig 2 pour typ 32A 100 120V AC typ 3 5 A 230V AC voir caract rist Fig 1 pas d arr t l appareil continue de fonctionner voir Fig 2 D roulement de la caract ristique voir Fig 1 Montage en parall le possible pas de r partition Conduites de raccordement 0 3 2 5 mm AWG 28 12 0 3 4 mm AWG 28 12 6 mm recommand Donn es climatiques Stockage transport Pleine charge Deratedd Temp rature ambiante Tamb mesur e 25 mm en dessous de l entr e d air dans le carter 25 85 10 60 60 70 de protection IP20 IEC60529 Prot ger contre l humidit et la ros e Securit Protection Voir suppl ment Securit Protection protection r sistance contre la surtension c t s
195. l timing figure 4 29 National Instruments Corporation 1 7 Index referenced single ended input RSE See RSE referenced single ended mode requirements for getting started 1 2 to 1 3 RSE referenced single ended mode configuration 4 9 to 4 10 description table 3 3 recommended configuration figure 4 12 single ended connections for floating signal sources 4 18 RTSI clocks 3 9 RTSI trigger lines overview 3 9 signal connection PCI devices figure 3 10 PXI devices figure 3 11 PXIE series devices figure 3 11 specifications A 9 sampling rate C 1 SCANCLK signal DAQ timing connections 4 33 description table 4 5 signal summary table 4 7 scanning multichannel 3 5 to 3 6 settling time in multichannel scanning 3 6 signal connections analog input 4 8 to 4 19 common mode signal rejection considerations 4 19 differential connection considerations 4 13 to 4 16 input modes 4 9 to 4 11 single ended connection considerations 4 17 to 4 19 summary of input connections table 4 12 types of signal sources 4 8 to 4 9 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Index analog output 4 19 to 4 20 digital I O 4 20 to 4 22 field wiring considerations 4 49 connectors 4 1 to 4 8 exceeding maximum ratings warning 4 1 T O connector details table 4 1 T O connector signal descriptions table 4 4 to 4 6 signal summary table 4 7 to 4 8 pin assignments figure 4 2 to 4 3 connecto
196. late WF11001 SN 100257 9 249 5086219 pressure transducer is used for measuring the cell pressure The wiring connection of the transducer consists of a shielded four cable wire which ends to a 5 pin socket plug 240 The wiring connection of the pres sure transducer follows the below mentioned cabling excitation voltage red excitation voltage green output voltage 4 blue output voltage yellow and ground shield Table 2 1 summarises the main specifica tions and calibration constants of the cell pressure transducer while Figure 2 6 and 2 7 show the calibration charts Moving right the next pressure line is connected to the specimen at the pedestal and is used either to flush water into the specimen or allow drainage from the specimen Along the line a 2200AGB1001A2UA003 pres sure transducer is used for measuring the pore water pressure T he wiring connection of the transducer consists of a shielded four cable wire which ends to a 5 pin socket plug 240 The wiring connection of the pressure transducer follows the below mentioned cabling excitation voltage 4 red excitation voltage yellow output voltage black output voltage white and ground shield Table 2 2 summarises the main specifications and calibration constants of the pore pressure transducer while Figure 2 9 and 2 10 show the calibration charts The third pressure line is connected to the air water pressure cell which is used to a
197. lay from water and dust A rapid approach facility is provided to reduce set up time The automatic datum facility returns the Tritech to previous settings when switched on and microswitches prevent platen over travel The load frame is of rigid chromed steel twin column construction for rigidity at high loads Stabilising bars are supplied as standard to screw into the top of triaxial cells of 70mm diameter or larger for added stability All external parts are either stove enamel painted or chrome plated for corrosion protection The loading platen is made from stainless steel Specification Maximum sample size 105mm diameter Minimum speed 0 00001mm per minute Maximum speed 9 99999mm per minute Maximum load 5OkN Minimum vertical clearance 335mm Maximum vertical clearance 1000mm Horizontal clearance 364mm Platen diameter 158mm Platen travel 100mm Height 1460mm Width 503mm Depth 380mm Ordering Information Part No Tritech 50 KN Load Frame 240V 50Hz 1ph 10056 Tritech 50 Load Frame 110V 60Hz 1ph 10057 Wykeham Farrance International Weston Road Copyright Wykeham Farrance International 2002 Slough England SL14HW 44 1753 571241 Fax 44 1753 811313 Email sales wfi co uk Geotechnical Triaxial Triaxial load frames TRITECH Triaxial Load Frames Standard BS 1377 8 ASTM D2850 D4767 NF P94 070 P94 074 WF 10026 Tritech triaxial load frame 10 cap 230 110 V 50 60 Hz 1 ph WF 10056
198. le dithering to reduce noise Your software enables and disables the dithering circuitry Figure 3 3 illustrates the effect of dithering on signal acquisition Figure 3 3a shows a small 4 LSB sine wave acquired with dithering off The ADC quantization is clearly visible Figure 3 3b shows what happens when 50 such acquisitions are averaged together quantization is still plainly visible In Figure 3 3c the sine wave is acquired with dithering on There is a considerable amount of visible noise but averaging about 50 such acquisitions as shown in Figure 3 3d eliminates both the added noise and the effects of quantization Dithering has the effect of forcing quantization noise to become a zero mean random variable rather than a deterministic function of the input signal 3 4 ni com Chapter 3 Hardware Overview a Dither disabled no averaging b Dither disabled average of 50 acquisitions c Dither enabled no averaging d Dither enabled average of 50 acquisitions Figure 3 3 Dithering Multichannel Scanning Considerations The devices can scan multiple channels at the same maximum rate as their single channel rate however pay careful attention to the settling times for each of the devices No extra settling time is necessary between channels as long as the gain is constant and source impedances are low Refer
199. lectron beam weld A robust steel titanium body fitted and a special gel is used to protect the strain gauges from corrosive pore water or condensation The other pressure transducers are produced to similar high standards but are intended to cover pressure ranges beyond those used in conventional test procedures INSPECTION Your Transducer was thoroughly inspected before it was shipped and should be ready to operate as soon as you have completed the setup procedure Notify Wykeham Farrance or your local agent and file a claim with any carriers involved if you find any damage to the machine SPECIFICATION Pressure range Supply Output Non linearity and hysteresis Temperature Compensation range Thermal zero shift Thermal sensitivity shift Temperature error band Thread size For plug connections refer to calibration certificate WF17021 0 1700 kPa 0 250 5 1 10v DC 100 mV 1 5 mV 0 02 FRO 18 0 66 C 0 02 RDG Deg 0 02 RDG Deg C NA 1 4 BSP WF17022 3300 kPa 0 500 p s i 10v DC 100 mV 1 5 mV 0 02 FRO 18 to 66 C 0 02 RDG Deg 0 02 RDG Deg 1 4 BSP WF17060 0 1000 kPa 0 145 p s i Bars Max 0 2 BSL 10Cto40C NA NA Max 0 5 WYKEHAM FARRANCE _ WF17021 WF17022 WF17060 Pressure Transducers WF17029 DE AIRING BLOCK A de airing block is required to connect the pr
200. level detection mode there are no minimum or maximum pulse width requirements imposed by the PFIs themselves but there can be limits imposed by the particular timing signal that is controlled These requirements are listed in this chapter under the section for each applicable signal DAQ Timing Connections 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual The DAQ timing signals are SCANCLK EXTSTROBE TRIGI TRIG2 STARTSCAN CONVERT AIGATE and SISOURCE Posttriggered data acquisition allows you to view only data that is acquired after a trigger event is received A typical posttriggered DAQ sequence is shown in Figure 4 17 Pretriggered data acquisition allows you to view data that is acquired before the trigger of interest in addition to data acquired after the trigger Figure 4 18 shows a typical pretriggered DAQ sequence The description for each signal shown in these figures is included in this chapter under the section for each corresponding signal TRIG1 STARTSCAN CONVERT LH ME I Scan Counter Figure 4 17 Typical Posttriggered Acquisition 4 32 ni com Chapter 4 Signal Connections TRIG1 TRIG2 STARTSCAN CONVERT Scan Counter Don t Care 0 LT mr ur 2 1 2 i 1 2 0 Figure 4 18 Typical Pretriggered Acquisition SCANCLK Signal S
201. lications UN Caution Exceeding the maximum input voltage ratings which are listed in Table 4 2 can damage the DAQ device and the computer National Instruments is not liable for any damages resulting from such signal connections 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual 4 20 ni com Chapter 4 Signal Connections LED 4 ot DIO lt 4 7 gt o gt TTL Signal o DIO lt 0 3 gt o p 5V VVV gt Switch Y 5 ae DGND Connector Figure 4 10 Digital 1 0 Connections Figure 4 10 shows DIO lt 0 3 gt configured for digital input and DIO lt 4 7 gt configured for digital output Digital input applications include receiving TTL signals and sensing external device states such as the state of the switch shown in the Figure 4 11 Digital output applications include sending TTL signals and driving external devices such as the LED shown in Figure 4 11 Figure 4 11 depicts signal connections for three typical digital I O applications National Instruments Corporation 4 21 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Chapter 4 Signal Connections LED ao M O O4 O TTL Signal O 5V 4 AN Switch E U X Connector DIO Device Figure 4 11 Digital 1 0 Connections Block Diagram Programmable Peripheral Interface 6025E only
202. linear strain transducer to automatic volume change unit 17051 Digital Dial Gauge 25mm travel with liquid crystal display 18037 Extension shaft for digital dial gauge to make contact on measuring 18045 anvil Copyright Wykeham Farrance International 2002 Wykeham Farrance International Weston Road Slough England SL1 4HW Tel 44 1753 571241 Fax 44 1753 811313 Email sales Qwfi co uk 4 The Data Acquisition System WF GeoDaq During common triaxial test the eight 8 transducers the axial force applied to the specimen measured by an external DBBSE A2242 50kN and an internal submersible load cell STALC3 24937 50kN the axial dis placement of the top cap of the specimen measured by a LVDT LSC HS50 9021 the volume change of the specimen measured by a WF automatic vol ume change apparatus WF17044 LSC HS25 9016 the cell pressure mea sured by two pressure transducers Port1 RS Type 249 8086219 and Port3 2200AGB1001A2UA003 and pore pressure measured at the pedestal Port2 2200AGB1001A2UA003 and top cap Port4 RS Type 249 T023096 are monitored by a data acquisition system The WF GeoDaq consists of the a terminal box where all transducers are plugged in an analog digital input output card installed in a personal computer and a data acquisition program which manages the registries In the following a short description of the three main parts of the WF GeoDaq will be pr
203. ll the cell with water or silicon oil and thus measure the cell pressure during a triaxial test and the other two are installed in the pore pressure line The main purpose of the on off valves in these pressure lines is to be able to isolate apply and measure the respective pressures cell and pore The installation of de airing blocks between the on off valves allows for the escape of trapped air inside the system of pipes hoses The base plate has also detachable base platens these are sometimes referred as pedestals or pressure pads Different platen sizes are available according to the diameter of the specimen The pedestal is fitted using three hexagonal headed screws On the upper side of the base plate there is a centering pimple or small projection There is an equivalent hole on the underside of the base platen the underside is the side with the O ring seals The pimple is located in the hole on the platen and the platen is then centered equally The base of the cell is now turned over The hexagonal screws are placed in the three holes until each is correctly seated The screws are tightened equally until tight Openings between the pedestal and the base plate allow for inter connection Looking from the top of the base plate see Figure2 4 the leftmost pres sure line is used to fill the chamber with water Along the line a RS Type 9 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax Figure 2 4 and side view of Wykeham Farrance base p
204. lly pull the RAM into the body of the triaxial cell taking care not to trap the electric cable A set of spanner flats are provided at the top of the load cell Use a spanner to hold these rigid Now carefully unscrew the RAM DO NOT APPLY ANY TORQUE THE SPANNER FLATS AND HENCE TO THE LOAD CELL YOU MUST TAKE GREAT CARE NOT TO TRAP OR ENTANGLE THE ELECTRICAL CABLE Proceed slowly failure to observe these precautions will result in the electrical cable being severed from the load cell When fitting the load cell to another RAM or piston follow these instructions in the reverse order AND DONT S Do NOT allow the load cell to impact on the triaxial cell top check that a circlip or other suitable device is fitted to the triaxial piston Always handle the load cell carefully They are delicate scientific instruments NEVER allow the maximum load to be exceeded intentionally Do NOT attempt to dismantle the load cell 7 Do keep the load cell and triaxial cell clean Do apply light machine oil sparingly to the triaxiai cell piston NEVER allow the piston to run dry Clean the piston periodically Do take care with the electric cable emerging from the piston do NOT allow them to become crushed by the dial gauge arm A3 1 1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION SUBMERSIBLE LOAD CELL TYPE 17100 SERIES Load Ranges Overload Capacity Rated output Excitation Voltage Non Linearity Hysteresis Deflection Ma
205. log input signals to your device depends on the type of input signal source and the configuration of the analog input channels you are using This section provides an overview of the different types of signal sources and analog input configuration modes More specific signal connection information is provided in the Analog Input Signal Connections section When configuring the input channels and making signal connections you must first determine whether the signal sources are floating or ground referenced 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual 4 8 ni com Chapter 4 Signal Connections Floating Signal Sources A floating signal source is not connected in any way to the building ground system but has an isolated ground reference point Some examples of floating signal sources are outputs of transformers thermocouples battery powered devices optical isolators and isolation amplifiers An instrument or device that has an isolated output is a floating signal source You must tie the ground reference of a floating signal to the analog input ground of your device to establish a local or onboard reference for the signal Otherwise the measured input signal varies as the source floats out of the common mode input range Ground Referenced Signal Sources A ground referenced signal source is connected in some way to the building system ground and is therefore already connected to a common ground point with respect to the device assuming that t
206. lower power consumption and a higher immunity to noise and jitter than off the shelf counter timer chips NI MITE ASIC designed to optimize data transfer for multiple simultaneous operations using bus mastering with one DMA channel interrupts or programmed I O NI PGIA Measurement and instrument class amplifier that guarantees settling times at all gains Typical commercial off the shelf amplifier components do not meet the settling time requirements for high gain measurement applications Lines Eight programmable function input lines that can be used for software controlled routing of interboard and intraboard digital and timing signals NATIONAL p INSTRUMENTS Low Cost Series Multifunction DAQ 12 or 16 Bit 200 kS s 16 Analog Inputs Full Featured E Series Low Cost E Series Basic Models NI 6030 NI 6031E 6052E NI 6070E NI 6071E NI 6040E NI 6034E NI 6036E NI 6023E NI 6024E PCI 6013 PCI 6014 NI 6032E NI 6033E NI 6025E Measurement Sensitivity mV 0 0023 0 0025 0 009 0 008 0 0036 0 008 0 004 Nominal Range V Positive FS Negative FS Absolute Accuracy mV 10 10 1 147 4 747 14 369 15 373 7 560 16 504 8 984 5 5 2 077 0 876 5 193 5 697 1 790 5 263 2 003 25 25 1 190 3 605 3 859 2 2 0 836 1 1 0 422 0 479 1 452 1 556 0 5 0 5 0 215 0 243 0 735 0 789 0 399 0 846 0 471 0 25 0 25 0 137 0 379 0 405 0 2 0 2 0 102 0 1 0 1
207. ltage and components storing substantial The unit contains elements which are suitable for recycling and Stored energy amounts of energy Improper handling may result in 3 components which need special disposal You are therefore an electric shock or serious burns The unit must not be opened except by appropriately trained personnel Do not introduce any objects into the unit Do not open the unit for at least 5 minutes after it has been disconnected from the mains on all poles Keep away from fire and water requested to make sure that the unit will be recycled by the end of its service life fs Remarks See enclosed leaflet Technical Data sub heading Connection to Mains or Output for details b unless there are other instructions either on the unit or in the enclosed leaflet Techni cal Data Not available with all units This is a general information leaflet for all units in the current range With some units devi Technical data leaflet enclosed always take priority In case of doubt ations from the instructions described here are possible therefore instructions in the ras the German version applies Fig 1 Vout VS lout min Vout NES E ma 2 6 M Fig 2 Derating 85 150 V ACin 150 264 V ACin 100 375 Ab 85 100 VDCin B b B b B c M
208. may be cleaned with a weak soap solution RECOMMENDED HINTS NEVER over tighten the fixing nuts on the rods which clamp the cell top and ringto the chamber The ram and bore are closely honed fits and must be protected whenever possible Prior to all tests the water surface inside the chamber must always have a small amount of CASTOR OIL upon it which is fed into the cell via the oil inlet valve on the cell top Thus when surplus liquid is inthe cell the oil is forced between the ram andthe bore We recommend castor preference to all other oils If the ram and bore become fixed due to along period of non use or to contamination UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES must an attempt be made to free them by gripping the ram with any device The simplest way to free them is to run hot water around the cell top not on the ram resulting in expansion of the cell top The ram will then fall easily from the above Then lightly coat the ram and bore with a light machine oil clean and gently re enter the ram using a reciprocating and rotating motion If storage is to be necessary ensure the ram and bush are cleaned then coated in alight machine oil and stored in a clean cupboard or box where soil dust is absent Preferably it should be covered with a polythene bag Refer to our catalogue for the part numbers of the internal accessories required for use with our triaxial cells and the choice of specimen sizes available W Wykeham Farrance ternati
209. medium either im aansducer or a digital dial gauge The linear strain a ee suitable for any data logging device which has an A to D converter working on a signal input The digital dial gauge has digital output suitable for use with a data logging device which requires digital input Refer to Wykeham Farrance catalogue WF17043 Automatic volume change unit has an operating capacity an accuracy of at ages a greater volume than 100 ml is required it is necessary to incorporate the WF17043 with a WF17042 this assembly is known as the WF17044 INSPECTION Your WF17043 WF17044 automatic volume change was thoroughly inspected before it was shipped and should be ready to operate as soon as you have completed the setup procedure Notify Wykeham Farrance or your local agent and file a claim with any carriers involved if you find any damage to the machine SPECIFICATION Distance of stroke Capacity of standard unit Overall height of WF17043 Overall height of WF17044 Overall diameter of WF17043 130 mm Overall dimensions of WF17044 220 x 170 mm Weight of WF17043 5kg Weight of WF17044 8kg These are without a transducer and bracket INSTALLATION OF WF17044 aodule 1e ihe VOLUME hus air can then Bs ofthe chamber as the de aired water is the gir It will be a DOW order to Till both sides of the apparatus After remo
210. more positions sometimes indicated by a switch on the older WF17135 17150 Systems In the 18000 series and WF18005 series range selection is by an internal sliding switch Please refer to the relevant operating manual In the case of some simple non WFE readout systems range adjustment is not provided and the inability to scale or range a load cell would indicate that the unit waa not intended for use with this type of device Users of the Autotech Mk2 do not have screw adjustable potentiometers The calibration is automatic users of Mk2 AUTOTECHS should refer to the Autotech Instruction Manual CLISP ussrs will find this manual included in Appendix A If a load cell wiil not hold its maximum value and decreases in a continuous manner without adjustment thia indicates failure of the Strain gauging and the matter should be referred to for investigation 6 A 3 0 8 RESOLUTION Same WF electronic measuring systems have nominal 16 bit resolution with accuracy of 1 in 20 000 available The output from the WF17100 Series load cells with a capacity of 256kN cannot be Bcaled in Newtons We suggest therefore that load cells are calibrated in kilograms force A 3 0 9 REMOVAL OF THE TRIAXIAL CELL RAM FROM THE LOAD CELL The Triaxial cell ram piston should only be removed when absolutely necessary 1 A 3 1 0 DO S Carefully remove the grub screw from the top hat on the top of the RAM Now carefu
211. motor drive card Change motor Change CPU card drive card Replace bulb Inspect wiring loom Replace card Replace switch Check loom in the wiring loom Change CPU card Change baud rate Check transmit fault receive lines Re configure computer problem remains contact your dealer or WYKEHAM FARRANCE CUSTOMER SERVICE DEPARTMENT Appendix ii TRITECH BLOCK DIAGRAM STEPPER MOTOR POWER MOTOR CONTROL SUPPLY CARD LIMIT MPU SWITCH MODULE FRONT PANEL SWITCH THUMBWHEEL CONTROLS 5 9999 UP FAST UP STOP DOWN FAST DOWN MAINS SUPPLY Cc TD SESS o JP3 HERDER JP2 HERDER am 58069669 C FF A lt C as 0000000 7 HC1 2 55 oooooooo0U 000000000 paa o oto RI 5 bert C is p 908 BILE O o Q 9509 95228 oooooonr Ooo006000660009 i 4342 82112 coz o ES Q oco 00 6 5 i DET TUS 74HC373 BEL INN E 000000000000000000000008 Sass 8 1931199 Hen th ole Ses 0o0000000001U I Ado
212. nd PXI buses analog input A 1 to 4 analog output A 4 to A 6 calibration A 9 digital I O A 7 to A 8 operating environment A 10 physical A 9 to A 10 power requirement A 9 storage environment A 10 timing I O A 8 triggers A 9 PCMCIA bus A 11 to A 18 analog input A 11 to A 14 analog output A 14 to A 16 calibration A 17 digital I O A 16 environment A 18 ni com physical 18 power requirements 17 timing I O A 16 to A 17 triggers A 17 STARTSCAN signal 4 36 to 4 38 STB signal description table 4 25 mode input timing figure 4 27 mode 2 bidirectional timing figure 4 29 storage environment specifications PCI and PXI buses A 10 system integration by National Instruments D 1 T technical support resources D 1 timing connections 4 30 to 4 49 DAQ timing connections 4 32 to 4 40 AIGATE signal 4 39 CONVERT signal 4 38 to 4 39 EXTSTROBE signal 4 33 to 4 34 SCANCLK signal 4 33 SISOURCE signal 4 40 STARTSCAN signal 4 36 to 4 38 TRIGI signal 4 34 to 4 35 TRIG signal 4 35 to 4 36 typical posttriggered acquisition figure 4 32 typical pretriggered acquisition figure 4 33 general purpose timing signal connections 4 43 to 4 49 FREQ OUT signal 4 49 GPCTRO GATE signal 4 44 to 4 45 GPCTRO OUT signal 4 45 GPCTRO SOURCE signal 4 43 to 4 44 GPCTRO UP DOWN signal 4 45 signal 4 46 to 4 47 National Instruments Corporation Index GPCTR1_OUT signal
213. nd the device In addition with DIFF input connections the PGIA can reject common mode noise pickup in the leads connecting the signal sources to the device The PGIA can reject common mode signals as long as V and V input signals are both within 11 V of AIGND Analog Output Signal Connections National Instruments Corporation 4 19 6024E and 6025E The analog output signals are DACOOUT DACIOUT and AOGND DACOOUT and DACIOUT are not available on the 6023E DACOOUT is the voltage output signal for analog output channel 0 DACIOUT is the voltage output signal for analog output channel 1 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Chapter 4 Signal Connections AOGND is the ground reference signal for both analog output channels and the external reference signal Figure 4 9 shows how to make analog output connections to your device DACOOUT OF Channel 0 VOUT 0 Load VOUT 1 Analog Output Channels DAC1OUT Load O4 Channel 1 Connector Figure 4 9 Analog Output Connections Digital 1 0 Signal Connections All Devices All devices have digital signals DIO lt 0 7 gt and DGND DIO lt 0 7 gt are the signals making up the DIO port and DGND is the ground reference signal for the DIO port You can program all lines individually as inputs or outputs Figure 4 10 shows signal connections for three typical digital I O app
214. nd these selections are fully software configurable Figure 3 4 shows an example of the signal routing multiplexer controlling CONVERT signal National Instruments Corporation 3 7 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Chapter 3 Hardware Overview TRTSI Trigger lt 0 6 gt lt gt CONVERT PFI lt 0 9 gt lt Sample Interval Counter TC GPCTRO OUT mi PCI and PXI Buses Only Figure 3 4 CONVERT Signal Routing Figure 3 4 shows that CONVERT can be generated from a number of sources including the external signals RTSI lt 0 6 gt PCI and PXI buses only and PFI lt 0 9 gt and the internal signals Sample Interval Counter TC and GPCTRO OUT On PCI and PXI devices many of these timing signals are also available as outputs on RTSI pins as indicated in 757 Triggers section in this chapter and on the PFI pins as indicated in Chapter 4 Signal Connections Programmable Function Inputs Ten PFI pins are available on the device connector as PFI lt 0 9 gt and connect to the internal signal routing multiplexer of the device for each timing signal Software can select any one of the PFI pins as the external source for a given timing signal It is important to note that you can use any of the PFI pins as an input by any of the timing signals and that multiple timing signals can use the same PFI simultaneously This flexible routing 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual 3
215. nfigured in the edge detection mode You can select any PFI pin as the source for WFTRIG and configure the polarity selection for either rising or falling edge The selected edge of the WFTRIG signal starts the waveform generation for the DACs The update interval UI counter is started if you select internally generated UPDATE 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual 4 40 ni com Chapter 4 Signal Connections As an output the WFTRIG signal reflects the trigger that initiates waveform generation This is true even if the waveform generation is externally triggered by another PFI The output is an active high pulse with a pulse width of 50 to 100 ns This output is set to high impedance at startup Figures 4 30 and 4 31 show the input and output timing requirements for the WFTRIG signal Rising Edge Polarity Falling Edge Polarity tw 10ns minimum Figure 4 30 WFTRIG Input Signal Timing 1 1 1 amp E 1 1 1 1 i ty 50 100 ns i 1 Figure 4 31 WFTRIG Output Signal Timing UPDATE Signal Any PFI pin can externally input the UPDATE signal which is available as an output on the PFIS UPDATE pin As an input the UPDATE signal is configured in the edge detection mode You can select any PFI pin as the source for UPDATE and configure the polarity selection for either rising or falling edge The selected edge of the UPDATE signal updates the outp
216. ng applications If you do not calibrate your device your signals and measurements could have very large offset gain and linearity errors Three levels of calibration are available to you and described in this chapter The first level is the fastest easiest and least accurate whereas the last level is the slowest most difficult and most accurate Loading Calibration Constants Your device is factory calibrated before shipment at approximately 25 C to the levels indicated in Appendix A Specifications The associated calibration constants the values that were written to the CalDACs to achieve calibration in the factory are stored in the onboard nonvolatile memory EEPROM Because the CalDACs have no memory capability they do not retain calibration information when the device is unpowered Loading calibration constants refers to the process of loading the CalDACs with the values stored in the EEPROM NI DAQ software determines when this is necessary and does it automatically If you are not using NI DAQ you must load these values yourself In the EEPROM there is a user modifiable calibration area in addition to the permanent factory calibration area This means that you can load the CalDACs with values either from the original factory calibration or from a calibration that you subsequently performed National Instruments Corporation 5 1 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Chapter 5 Calibration Self Calibratio This method o
217. ng cell outside the chamber or by a submersible load cell inside the chamber Although the piston can freely slide through the bush there is always low friction appearing in the contact In order to estimate the friction developed on the side contact surface of the loading ram and bush the user may install one submersible load cell and one externally installed load cell and thus estimate the friction during a test see Figure 2 24 Typical calibration tests performed for the WF triaxial cell give a rough estimation of the above friction The friction depends on the axial compressive load the O ring installed in the bush and on the cell pressure For this reason two 50kN compressive capacity load cells have been installed in the triaxial cell The first one is an externally installed load cell mounted on the reaction beam of the loading frame It is a stainless steel fully welded S Beam tension and compression load cell DBBSE 50kN Series Applied Measurements Limited Serial No A2242 Table 2 6 summarises the specifications of the DBBSE 50kN A2242 load cell The wiring connection of the transducer consists of a shielded four cable wire which ends to a 5 pin socket plug 240 The wiring connection of the load cell follows the below mentioned cabling 25 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax Operator GIO amp Place GeoLab Date 2004 09 06 Time 19 45 Maximum compressive load 50 0kN Calibration constant 2 431kN mV Linea
218. ng in or out of the specimen will be sent to the upper or lower chamber of the volume change apparatus The switching between the upper and lower chamber allows for infinite specimen volume change The apparatus utilises an external measuring medium either a linear strain transducer or digital dial gauge The linear strain transducer is mounted by a bracket which holds the transducer in place and monitors the vertical movement of the piston of the apparatus The LSC H S25 9016 linear displacement transducer is utilised for this reason 33 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax Figure 3 1 Wykeham Farrance volume change apparatus photo taken from WF web site 3 2 Installation The back pressure line from the triaxial set up should be connected to the right hand side of the reversing control module box when viewed from the front The left hand side connection on the control module box should be connected to the back pressure valve situated in the base of the triaxial cell The linear strain transducer or digital dial gauge indicator should be mounted using the appropriate bracket so that its lower spindle end rests against the moving anvil protruding from the side of the volume change cell The unit must be slowly filled using de aired water by setting the left hand valve on the module to the Volume Change position as marked and the lefthand valve to the Flow up position Any entrapped air can then be bled from the unit by releasi
219. ng measurement and automation systems At the NI Developer Zone you can easily access the latest example programs system configurators tutorials technical news as well as a community of developers ready to share their own techniques Customer Education National Instruments provides a number of alternatives to satisfy your training needs from self paced tutorials videos and interactive CDs to instructor led hands on courses at locations around the world Visit the Customer Education section of ni com for online course schedules syllabi training centers and class registration System Integration If you have time constraints limited in house technical resources or other dilemmas you may prefer to employ consulting or system integration services You can rely on the expertise available through our worldwide network of Alliance Program members To find out more about our Alliance system integration solutions visit the System Integration section of ni com National Instruments Corporation D 1 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Appendix D Technical Support Resources Worldwide Support National Instruments has offices located around the world to help address your support needs You can access our branch office Web sites from the Worldwide Offices section of ni com Branch office web sites provide up to date contact information support phone numbers e mail addresses and current events If you have searched the techni
220. ng the bleed cell valve located in the centre of the top of the cell chamber as the de aired water is fed into the cell When water exudes from the bleed valve in the upper plate of the cell tighten the screw to seal the upper chamber It is then necessary to repeat the procedure from the lower chamber the apparatus must be lifted off the reversing control box and inverted to remove the air It will be necessary to reverse the water flow direction of Flow down using the flow valve in order to fill both sides of the apparatus After removing the air it is advisable to leave the apparatus overnight or at least eight hours with an internal pressure of approximately 700kPa 34 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax FAUTO VOLUME CHANGI Figure 3 2 Wykeham Farrance volume change apparatus front panel WF17044 SN 107584 7 This will allow any remaining trapped air to be absorbed into the solution After this period the apparatus should be carefully flushed out using new de aired water and thus displacing the aerated water This flushing procedure must be carried out in both upper and lower chambers It may be necessary to repeat this procedure once more if any signs of air pockets occur during the first two days of operation 3 3 Control Module Valve Positions The reversing control module WF17042 which forms the base of the WF 17044 has the following controls and operating positions These are two valves The one on the left hand side
221. ning Due to the previously described limitations of settling times resulting from these conditions multiple channel scanning is not recommended unless sampling rates are low enough or it is necessary to sample several signals as nearly simultaneously as possible The data is much more accurate and channel to channel independent if you acquire data from each channel independently for example 100 points from channel 0 then 100 points from channel 1 then 100 points from channel 2 and so on Analog Output 6025E and 6024E only These devices supply two channels of analog output voltage at the I O connector The bipolar range is fixed at 10 V Data written to the digital to analog converter DAC is interpreted in two s complement format Analog Output Glitch In normal operation a DAC output glitches whenever it is updated with a new value The glitch energy differs from code to code and appears as distortion in the frequency spectrum 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual 3 6 ni com Chapter 3 Hardware Overview Digital 1 0 The devices contain eight lines of digital I O DIO lt 0 7 gt for general purpose use You can individually software configure each line for either input or output At system startup and reset the digital I O ports are all high impedance The hardware up down control for general purpose counters 0 and 1 are connected onboard to DIO6 and DIO7 respectively Thus you can use DIO6 and DIO7 to control
222. nne 4 48 Figure B 1 68 Pin E Series Connector Pin Assignments see B 3 Figure B 2 68 Pin Extended Digital Input Connector Pin Assignments B 4 Figure B 3 50 Pin E Series Connector Pin Assignments esee B 5 Figure B 4 50 Pin Extended Digital Input Connector Pin Assignments B 6 Tables Table 3 1 Available Input Configurations eene 3 3 Table 3 2 Measurement Precision 3 3 Table 3 3 Pins Used by PXI E Series 3 11 Table 4 1 Connector Details tate peti 4 1 Table 4 2 Connector Signal 1 4 4 Table 4 3 I O Sign l Summary 2 2 nr re eb tee 4 7 Table 4 4 Port C Signal Assignments 4 23 Table 4 5 Signal Names Used in Timing Diagrams eee 4 25 National Instruments Corporation ix 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual About This Manual The 6023 6024 and 6025 E Series boards are high performance multifunction analog digital and timing I O boards for PCI PXI PCMCIA and CompactPCI bus computers Supported functions include analog input analog output digital I O and timing I O This manual describes the electrical and mechanical aspects of the PCI 6023E PCI 6024E DAQCard 6024E PCI 6025E and PXI 6025E boards from the E Series product line and contains information concerning their operation and programming Convention
223. nstitution of Civil Engineers and the Terzaghi Lecturer of the American Society of Civil Engineers He was the first recipient of the Karl Terzaghi Award from the ASCE Contents Preface ix 1 The Wykeham Farrance loading frame WF10056 SN 100175 T 1 The Wykeham Farrance triaxial cell WF11001 SN 100257 9 7 2 1 The base plate of the WF triaxial cell 9 2 2 The WF 19 The WF volume change apparatus WF17044 SN 107584 7 33 9 L troduction ye ee ee ae SS E 33 3 2 Installation eot ise oe ee P Dat 34 3 3 Control Module Valve Positions 35 SA Calibration a sey Ree Ae Doris 35 The Data Acquisition System WF GeoDaq 41 41 terminal 41 4 2 The analog digital input outup card 46 43 The data acquisition program 49 ii CONTENTS List of Figures 1 Arthur 7 2 The GeoLab WF Triaxial Apparatus 1 1 Wykeham Farrance 50kN typical triaxial loading frame photo taken from WF website 2 1 2 Wykeham Farrance 50kN triaxial frame photo 3 1 3 Wykeham Farrance 50KN triaxial frame front panel photo 4 14 Wykeham Farrance 50KN triaxial frame rear view photo 4 1 5 Wykeham Farrance 50kN triaxial frame side and top view 5 1 6 Calibration o
224. nstruments Corporation 2 3 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Hardware Overview This chapter presents an overview of the hardware functions on your device Figure 3 1 shows a block diagram for the PCI 6023E PCI 6024E PCI 6025E and PXI 6025E Voltage Calibration REF DACs Analog Mode Multiplexer Calibration Dither Mux Generator AID ADC Converter i FIFO Data Generic Bus Interface cam Address Data PFI Trigger Timing Digital 1 0 Connector Configuration Al Control Memory IRQ DMA Trigger Analog Input es i Request Counter Bus Timing jo DAQ STC interface Analog Output 1 RTSI Bus Digital O Timing Contro Interface Address Analog 1 Input i Control Interface 1 PI DAQ APE Interface Analog 1 82055 Output Bus Control DIO 1 Interface Control AO Control 1 Analog Output 1 1 _ Not 6023 DAC1 Calibration DACs 6025 Only DIO Control RTSI Connector PCI Connector for PCI 602X PXI Connector for PXI 6025E Figure 3 1 PCI 6023E PCI 6024E PCI 6025E and 6025 Block Diagram National Instruments Corporation 3 1 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Chapter 3 Hardware Overview Figure 3 2 shows the block diagram for
225. nt and must be connected with the cor Ensure proper polarity at output terminals rect polarity Grounding Do not operate without PE connection To comply with Sufficient air cooling must be ensured and safety standards CE mark approvals the unit must only be operated if the PE terminal is connected to In operation As long as the unit is in operation do not modify the the non fused earth conductor No modifica installation The same applies also to the secondary side Secondary side is not earthed if necessary the or ter tions Risk of electric arcs and electric shock could cause minal can be earthed optionally death Internal fuse The internal input fuse protects the unit and must not be replaced by the user In case of internal defect the unit must Sa a il plug connectors when the power be returned to the manufacturer for safety reasons Convection Do not cover any ventilation holes Note Removal Cooling Leave sufficient space around the Removal Before removal Switch mains power off and disconnect your itf ling dation Detaching from the system from the supply network Ing torrecommenoa f support rail See Fig 5 push the slider downwards unlock Gently lift lower for spacing see supplementary sheet Technical Data front edge of the unit tipping and remove Warning The unit contains unprotected conductors carrying a Reycling High voltage lethal high vo
226. nt side for locking i regulations must be ensured Before operation is v Shake the unit slightly to check the locking action begun the following conditions must be ensured in par Front elements Fig 1 ticular Operation Indicates whether the unit is working properly Green LED is on Connection to mains supply in compliance with indicator in normal operation and goes out if overloaded VDE0100 and EN50178 Potentiometer 2 Setting the output voltage With stranded wires all strands must be secured in D Connection Internal fuse the terminal blocks potentia danger of short circuit Unit and power supply cables must be properly fused Connection Data for permitted loads cable cross sections and stripping k as well as for external fusing see the enclosed leaflet A disconnecting device has to be provided for the end nical Data sub heading Connection to Mains or Output product to disengage unit and supply cables from Handling of the terminals see Fig 4 supply mains if required Use 20 CADOS designed for the indicated volt E age and current values The non fused earth conductor must be connected to With flexible cables make sure that all cable strands are the terminal protection class 1 secured in the terminal All output lines must be rated for the power supply Suitable conductor terminal sleeves ferrules may be used output curre
227. nts made with your device if you do not take proper care when running signal wires between signal sources and the device The following recommendations apply mainly to analog input signal routing to the device although they also apply to signal routing in general Minimize noise pickup and maximize measurement accuracy by taking the following precautions e Use DIFF analog input connections to reject common mode noise e Use individually shielded twisted pair wires to connect analog input signals to the device With this type of wire the signals attached to the CH and CH inputs are twisted together and then covered with a shield You then connect this shield only at one point to the signal source ground This kind of connection is required for signals traveling through areas with large magnetic fields or high electromagnetic interference National Instruments Corporation 4 49 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Calibration This chapter discusses the calibration procedures for your device If you are using the NI DAQ device driver that software includes calibration functions for performing all of the steps in the calibration process Calibration refers to the process of minimizing measurement and output voltage errors by making small circuit adjustments For these devices these adjustments take the form of writing values to onboard calibration DACs CalDACs Some form of device calibration is required for all but the most forgivi
228. nual analog output signal connections 4 19 to 4 20 description table 4 4 signal summary table 4 7 B bipolar input 3 3 block diagrams 6023E 6024E 6025E devices 3 1 DAQCard 6024E 3 2 cables See also I O connectors custom cabling B 1 to B 2 field wiring considerations 4 49 optional equipment 1 5 calibration 5 1 to 5 3 adjusting gain error 5 3 external calibration 5 2 loading calibration constants 5 1 to 5 2 self calibration 5 2 specifications PCI and PXI buses A 9 PCMCIA bus A 17 charge injection 3 6 clocks device and RTSI 3 9 commonly asked questions See questions and answers common mode signal rejection considerations 4 19 CompactPCI products using with PXI 1 2 configuration common questions C 2 hardware configuration 2 3 connectors See I O connectors conventions used in manual xi xii CONVERT signal DAQ timing connections 4 38 to 4 39 signal routing figure 3 8 custom cabling B 1 to B 2 customer education D 1 ni com 0 DACOOUT signal analog output signal connections 4 19 to 4 20 description table 4 4 signal summary table 4 7 DACIOUT signal analog output signal connections 4 19 to 4 20 description table 4 4 signal summary table 4 7 DAQ timing connections 4 32 to 4 40 AIGATE signal 4 39 signal 4 38 to 4 39 EXTSTROBE signal 4 33 to 4 34 SCANCLK signal 4 33 SISOURCE signal 4 40 STARTSCAN signal 4 36 to 4 38 TRIGI signal 4
229. o Ae 0 00 0 00 0 00 a 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 m 0 00 0 00 0 00 1 610 14 i 0 00 A 1 610 14 289 83 Danom 0 ment tv napayyenia EYNOAO EURO 1 899 97 E 100 peTpNTols evr c 30 mv oe pe 647 413 wx ouv kat mv av nwel eibn napap vouv OMV s amp g nans c mv ETAPA APPLIEO MEASUREMENTS i L fD UK yia SleuKpivien Kat OAG ora LZ loyus 90 Kpatnasig 1 2 uexpr tv ka va napano 10 npepwv 3 Qi Tes ava uovabuv KOVOV Karoniv auuqoviac 4
230. o 4 16 exceeding common mode input ranges caution 4 10 PGIA figure 4 10 recommended input connections figure 4 12 single ended connection 4 17 to 4 19 floating signal sources RSE configuration 4 18 grounded signal sources NRSE configuration 4 18 to 4 19 summary of input connections table 4 12 types of signal sources 4 8 to 4 9 floating signal sources 4 9 ground referenced signal sources 4 9 analog input specifications PCI and PXI buses A 1 to A 4 accuracy information A 2 amplifier characteristics A 3 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Index dynamic characteristics A 4 input characteristics A 1 to A 2 stability A 4 transfer characteristics A 3 PCMCIA bus A 11 to A 14 accuracy information A 12 amplifier characteristics A 13 dynamic characteristics A 13 input characteristics A 11 stability A 13 to A 14 transfer characteristics A 12 analog output analog output glitch 3 6 common questions C 2 to C 3 overview 3 6 signal connections 4 19 to 4 20 analog output specifications PCI and PXI buses A 4 to A 6 accuracy information A 5 dynamic characteristics A 6 output characteristics A 4 to A 5 stability A 6 transfer characteristics A 5 voltage output A 6 PCMCIA bus A 14 to A 16 accuracy information A 14 dynamic characteristics A 15 output characteristics A 14 stability A 16 transfer characteristics A 14 to A 15 voltage output A 15 AOGND signal 6023E 6024E 6025E User Ma
231. o 4 43 UPDATE signal 4 41 to 4 42 WFTRIG signal 4 40 to 4 41 Web support from National Instruments D 1 WFTRIG signal 4 40 to 4 41 Worldwide technical support D 2 WR signal description table 4 26 mode 1 output timing figure 4 28 mode 2 bidirectional timing figure 4 29 ni com The Handbook of WF GeoTriax Drained u volume change yi Front Panel File Edit Operate Tools Browse Window Help D gt e 13pt Application Font 205 8 f 2 xa RST E Pore PressurePon 02 Pore Pressure 1 04 11 4 103 258 280 Pressure P oec height Curent specimen ameter Current specimens area 1104 89 105 31 109 268 ad 0 0 STOP Submersible Load Cell k Axial Displacement mm 3 10 40 z 2530 25 oeei 10 40 25 3 E 5 T k E Press to reset dx Sra e 95 axial deformation force amp volume chat EE Wee gt Deviatoric Stress Strain plane 9 Plot 0 Volumetric Strain evol Axial Strain ez Plot 0 2 800 Speed pee LOADING 101000 STOP sto Speed UNLOADING 01000 1000 4 9003 40 4 go mm g Deviatoric Stress q kPa 2 0 25 5 75 10 125 15 175 20 225 25 Axial Strain ez 9 5 Stress rati
232. o n Axial Strain ez Plot 0 MERE Inbox for ME SE Report 3 s t Corel PHO 2 Adobe Acr EN SS Figure 4 10 The Labview v 7 1 interface 4 3 The data acquisition program Having all the above components successfully installed the analog signal from the transducers is converted into digital and the computer is able to proceed with the data manipulation The last piece of the puzzle is an acquisition program that will allow for the manipulation of the stored data during and after the test For this purpose NI Labview 7 10 is the data acquisition program installed Its graphical interface including evolution graphs leds buttons control and display strings etc allows for synchronous to the testing time and visual interpretation of the measured properties of the test 49 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax 50 Bibliography 1 Experimental Soil Mechanics Jean Pierre Bardet Prentice Hall 2 The Measurment of Soil Properties in the Triaxial test 2nd ed Bishop A W and D J Henkel Edward Arnold London pp 228 3 Manual of Soil Laboratory Testing Volume 3 Effective Stress Tests John Wiley amp Sons New York Head K H 1986 51
233. ol split former split mould samplers WF 10201 1 4 in WF 10460 WF 10542 WF 10400 WF 10430 WF 10669 WF 10627 35mm WF 10460 WF 10542 WF 10401 WF 10431 WF 10669 WF 10622 38 mm WF 10460 WF 10542 WF 10410 WF 10440 WF 10670 WF 10623 50 mm WF 10480 WF 10544 WF 10421 WF 10451 WF 10671 WF 10624 WF 10751 2 8 in WF 10810 WF 10545 WF 10801 WF 10792 WF 10866 WF 10628 70 mm WF 10810 WF 10545 WF 10802 WF 10793 WF 10866 WF 10625 WF 11001 100 mm WF 11080 WF 10546 WF 11052 WF 11053 WF 11044 WF 10626 105 mm WF 11081 WF 10547 WF 11054 WF 11044 WF 10629 11144 150 WF 11210 WF 10548 WF 11191 11242 Triaxial sample Filter paper for side drainage Triaxial cell accessories Back pressure Gaag WF 10623 w Wykeham Farrance 29 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax Figure 2 3 Wykeham Farrance base plate WF11001 SN 100257 9 2 1 The base plate of the WF triaxial cell The base plate of the triaxial cell is a circular light alloy material of thickness tbase plate and diameter dhase plate on Which the chamber is firmly screwed The watertightness of the base plate and the chamber is achieved via an O ring which is placed in a circular groove on the base plate Eight 8 on off valves four 4 de airing blocks with analog and digital pressure transducers are installed in the four pressure lines coming out of the base plate Two of them are used to fi
234. ompression machine is stopped and the data Gisplay is adjusted to read the maximum value in kgf using the span or ga n screw control span pot 7 The load is now slowly decreased until a zero load condition is reached The data display is again adjusted to read zero 5 3 0 5 A3 0 6 A 3 0 7 using a zero pot The maximum load Slowly re applied and the data display adjusted to read the maximum value using the gain pot The load is the again slowly decreased to zero and this process repeated until close agreement is reached at zero and maximum load When a stable zero and maximum load condition is reached the linearity can be checked applying the load series of increments say 10 25 and 75 percent of maximum and up to the maximum load itself 1 An alternative method involves the removal of the p ston from the triaxial cell The piston and load cell are then placed in a special ranging rig which makes the use of a steel block unnecessary Ali other calibration operations are the same in both cases CALIBRATION either the zero or gain pot clicks when being adjusted this indicates that it has been adjusted beyond its range In this case double check that the zero has been correctly adjusted remember that there is a coarse and fine zero pot on the majority of systems If thia does not solve the problem the range factor the channel needs to be altered these have two
235. onal gt Banded Cell j For extra protection when using compressed air systems gt 2000kPa and 3400kPa working pressure 3400kPa on 70mm cell gt Separate cell chamber clamping Prevents over stressing chamber Ensures correct alignment 2000 amp 3400 kPa Triaxial Cells Designed to accommodate advanced electronic testing amp monitoring devices All cells are fitted as standard with 5 no volume change valves built in ram clamp dial gauge or transducer supports and large easy to use clamp control handles In addition WFi provides a service to adapt cells to accommodate special testing requirements Four cell sizes SampleSie PartNo Total Solution Provider Technical Specification Triaxial Cells and Accessories Cell Part Sample Pedestal Top Ca se Di M rane Es eee eee mo 10490 10500 10510 10821 Ye Device Placing Tool Split Former Split Mould 10201 10751 11001 105mm 11081 10547 11054 Wykeham Farrance International Weston Road Copyright Wykeham Farrance International 2002 Slough England SL1 4HW Tek 444 1753 571241 Fax 44 1753 811313 Email sales wii co uk Geotechnical Triaxial WF Triaxial cells for specimens up to 150 mm dia Triaxial cells All cells are fitted as standard with 5 no volume change valves built in ram clamp dial gauge or transducer supports and large easy to use clamp control
236. ons This voltage is stable enough for most applications but if you are using your device at an extreme temperature or if the onboard reference has not been measured for a year or more you may wish to externally calibrate your device An external calibration refers to calibrating your device with a known external reference rather than relying on the onboard reference Redetermining the value of the onboard reference is part of this process and you can save the results in the EEPROM so you should not have to perform an external calibration very often You can externally calibrate your device by calling the NI DAQ calibration function To externally calibrate your device be sure to use a very accurate external reference Use a reference that is several times more accurate than the device itself 5 2 ni com Chapter 5 Calibration Other Considerations The CalDACs adjust the gain error of each analog output channel by adjusting the value of the reference voltage supplied to that channel This calibration mechanism is designed to work only with the internal 10 V reference Thus in general it is not possible to calibrate the analog output gain error when using an external reference In this case it is advisable to account for the nominal gain error of the analog output channel either in software or with external hardware See Appendix A Specifications for analog output gain error information National Instruments Corporation 5 3 60
237. or The UI counter uses the UISOURCE signal as a clock to time the generation of the UPDATE 4 42 ni com Chapter 4 Signal Connections signal You must configure the PFI pin you select as the source for the UISOURCE signal in the level detection mode You can configure the polarity selection for the PFI pin for either active high or active low Figure 4 34 shows the timing requirements for the UISOURCE signal tp 50 ns minimum ty 23 ns minimum Figure 4 34 UISOURCE Signal Timing The maximum allowed frequency is 20 MHz with a minimum pulse width of 23 ns high or low There is no minimum frequency limitation Either the 20 MHz or 100 kHz internal timebase normally generates the UISOURCE signal unless you select some external source General Purpose Timing Signal Connections The general purpose timing signals are GPCTRO_SOURCE GPCTRO_GATE GPCTRO_OUT GPCTRO_UP_DOWN GPCTR1_SOURCE GPCTR1_GATE GPCTR1_OUT GPCTR1_UP_DOWN and FREQ_OUT GPCTRO_SOURCE Signal Any PFI pin can externally input the GPCTRO_SOURCE signal which is available as an output on the PFI8 GPCTRO_SOURCE pin As an input the GPCTRO_SOURCE signal is configured in the edge detection mode You can select any PFI pin as the source for GPCTRO_SOURCE and configure the polarity selection for either rising or falling edge As an output the GPCTRO_SOURCE signal reflects the actual clock connected to general purpose counter 0 This is
238. oved CALIBRATION In order to use the electrical output of the pressure transducer Ris iknow saeg The procedure for calibration will differ with the type of readout instf ent used The for calibtation should therefore be contained in the instruction manual for the readout device However the following general comments apply to all instruments 1 The transducer should be connected to the read out device and allow to Jin te beur e 2 transducer should be so before calibration is attempted You do this by raising the pressure applied to the transducer tolli meman 3 times 3 After de airing the system close the cell valve and de airing block valve and remove bleed nut The trans ducer is now open to the atmosphere and under zero pressure 4 Adjust the zero potentiometer to zero or press button on the read out unit 5 Open Valve de airing block and then replace bleed nut and gently tighten Now apply the maximum pressure and adjust the gain to read the pressure applied or press button for maximum gain 6 Now close valve on de airing block and remove bleed Nut Now check zero and maximum pressure on display If they do not agree then you should repeat the calibration again Starting at step 4 until good agreement is reached at zero and maximum pressure Once this condition has been attained intermediate pressure values may be checked to establish the linearity of the tr
239. ownto distribute the oil evenly The cell is now ready for use OPERATION The following is a brief summary of the use of the various ancillary items that are used with the Triaxial cell and an outline of some of the more common test procedures TYPE OF STANDARD TEST The triaxial tests which are used throughout the world vary but generally they can be divided into two main groups 1 UNCONSOLIDATED UNDRAINED COMPRESSION TEST 2 CONSOLIDATED DRAINED OR UNDRAINED COMPRESSION TEST WITH EITHER VOLUME CHANGE OR PORE WATER PRESSURE MEASUREMENTS In this latter test the following additional accessories are required Porous drainage disks Top drainage Filter drains Pressure transducers or null indicator for pore water pressure measurement 23 Triax001 Volume change apparatus either electronic or manually controlled There is an extensive library of technical books describing triaxial test techniques in existence throughout the world therefore this document does not cover test methods MAINTENANCE OF TRIAXIAL CELLS Do not use abrasive materials to clean the ram Do not allow the ram to become contaminated with dirt clean regularly with a suitable product such as W D 40 DO NOT allow any cleaning productto come into contact with the perspex chamber After cleaning the ram with the W D 40 the ram should be lightly ae machine oil such as 3 in 1 or with castor oil PERSPEX CHAMBER The perspex chamber
240. p to eight channels Input modes are programmed on a per channel basis for multimode scanning For example you can configure the circuitry to scan 12 channels four DIFF channels and eight RSE channels Table 3 1 describes the three input configurations 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual 3 2 ni com Chapter 3 Hardware Overview Table 3 1 Available Input Configurations Configuration Description DIFF A channel configured in DIFF mode uses two analog input lines One line connects to the positive input of the programmable gain instrumentation amplifier PGIA of the device and the other connects to the negative input of the PGIA RSE A channel configured in RSE mode uses one analog input line which connects to the positive input of the PGIA The negative input of the PGIA is internally tied to analog input ground AIGND NRSE A channel configured in NRSE mode uses one analog input line which connects to the positive input of the PGIA The negative input of the PGIA connects to analog input sense AISENSE For diagrams showing the signal paths of the three configurations refer to the Analog Input Signal Overview section in Chapter 4 Signal Connections Input Range The devices have a bipolar input range that changes with the programmed gain You can program each channel with a unique gain of 0 5 1 0 10 or 100 to maximize the 12 bit analog to digital converter ADC resolution With the proper gain
241. performs A D conversions Reference all signals to ground either at the source device or at the device If you have a floating source reference the signal to ground by using the RSE input mode or the DIFF input configuration with bias resistors see the Differential Connections for Nonreferenced or Floating Signal Sources section If you have a grounded source do not reference the signal to AIGND You can avoid this reference by using DIFF or NRSE input configurations Analog Input Signal Connections The following sections discuss the use of single ended and DIFF measurements and recommendations for measuring both floating and ground referenced signal sources Figure 4 4 summarizes the recommended input configuration for both types of signal sources National Instruments Corporation 4 11 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Chapter 4 Signal Connections Signal Source Type Grounded Signal Source Floating Signal Source Not Connected to Building Ground Examples Examples Ungrounded Thermocouples Plug in instruments with e Signal conditioning with isolated outputs nonisolated outputs Battery devices Differential DIFF See text for information on bias resistors NOT RECOMMENDED Single Ended Ground Referenced RSE Ground loop losses Vg are added to measured signal Single Ended Nonreferenced AIGND See text for information on bias resistors Figure 4 4 Summar
242. pply the cell pressure At the same time it can be used to fill the cell with water Along its line a 2200AGB1001A2UA003 pressure transducer is used for measuring the cell pressure The wiring connection of the transducer consists of a shielded four cable wire which ends to a 5 pin socket plug 240 The wiring connection of the pressure transducer follows the below mentioned cabling excitation voltage 4 red excitation voltage 10 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax Operator GIO GIO amp NITHE Place GeoLab GeoLab Date 2004 07 04 2004 11 23 Time 15 30 13 55 Maximum pressure 10 0bar 10 0bar Calibration constant 9 947kPa mV 10 006kPa mV Linearity 99 999 99 999 Excitation voltage 10 11Volts 10 11 Volts Voltage Sensitivity 9 80mV V 9 36mV V Sampling rate 1 000samples sec 1 000samples sec Temperature 30 80 24 00 Humidity 34 31 Table 2 1 RS Type 249 S086219 Cell Pressure Port1 Calibration Table Figure 2 5 Cell pressure line Port1 11 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax Pressure kPa Calibration of Pressure Transducer S 086219 Port 01 GeoLab GIO 04 July 2004 PCI 6024E 1 200 1 000 800 600 4 400 200 y 9 967x 1 378 e 1 000 6 y 9 213x 1 307 vet 0 995 t 20 0 60 0 700 800 90 0 100 0 110 0 120 0 130 0 140 Voltage mV Figure 2 6 RS Type 249 5086219 Pressure Port1 Calibration 2004 07 04 Pressure kPa 1 400 C
243. ppm C Analog Output 6024E and 6025E only Output Characteristics Number of channels 2 voltage 12 bits 1 in 4 096 Max update rate DMA hale tangas 10 kHz system dependent Internpts cveci detected 1 kHz system dependent Type Ot neveu Double buffered multiplying 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual A 4 ni com Appendix Specifications for PCI and PXI Buses FIFO buffer 876 None Data transfers interrupts programmed I O DMA Scatter gather Single transfer demand transfer Accuracy Information Absolute Accuracy Absolute Nominal Range V of Reading Accuracy at Temp Drift Full Scale Positive FS Negative FS 24 Hours 90 Days 1 Year Offset mV C mV 10 10 0 0177 0 0197 0 0219 5 93 0 0005 8 127 Note Temp Drift applies only if ambient is greater than 10 C of previous external calibration Transfer Characteristics Relative accuracy INL After calibration 0 3 LSB typ 0 5 LSB max Before calibration 4 LSB max DNL After calibration 0 3 LSB typ 1 0 LSB max Before calibration 3 LSB max Monotonicity eese 12 bits guaranteed after calibration Offset error After calibration
244. puter 4 Touch any metal part of your computer chassis to discharge any static electricity that might be on your clothes or body 5 Insert the device into a 5 V PCI slot Gently rock the device to ease it into place It may be a tight fit but do not force the device into place 6 Screw the mounting bracket of the device to the back panel rail of the computer 7 Visually verify the installation Replace the top cover of your computer 9 Plug in and turn on your computer PCMCIA card installation Insert the DAQCard into any available Type II PCMCIA slot until the connector is seated firmly Insert the card face up It is keyed so that you can only insert it one way PXI device installation 1 Turn off and unplug your computer 2 Choose an unused slot in your system For maximum performance the device has an onboard DMA controller that you can only use if the device is installed in a slot that supports bus arbitration or bus master cards National Instruments recommends installing the device in such a slot The PXI specification requires all slots to support bus master cards but the CompactPCI specification does not If you install in a CompactPCI non master slot you must disable the onboard DMA controller of the device using software 3 Remove the filler panel for the slot you have chosen 2 2 ni com Chapter 2 Installation and Configuration 4 Touch any metal part of your computer chassis to discharge any s
245. r device is shipped in an antistatic package to prevent electrostatic damage to the device Electrostatic discharge can damage several components on the device To avoid such damage in handling the device take the following precautions e Ground yourself by using a grounding strap or by holding a grounded object e Touch the antistatic package to a metal part of your computer chassis before removing the device from the package e Remove the device from the package and inspect the device for loose components or any other sign of damage Notify National Instruments if the device appears damaged in any way Do not install a damaged device into your computer Never touch the exposed pins of connectors National Instruments Corporation 2 1 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Configuration Hardware Installation 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual After installing your software you are ready to install your hardware Your device will fit in any available slot in your computer However to achieve best noise performance leave as much room as possible between your device and other devices The following are general installation instructions Consult your computer user manual or technical reference manual for specific instructions and warnings PCI device installation 1 Turn off and unplug your computer 2 Remove the top cover of your computer 3 Remove the expansion slot cover on the back panel of the com
246. re range must be compatible with the maximum pressure being measured Pressure media must be compatible with the transducer transmitter wetted parts listed in these instructions Liquid must not be allowed to freeze in the pressure port The gasket must be fitted under the electrical connector MECHANICALINSTALLATION Mounting Omni directional self supported directly into the pipework Use a 19mm AF 3 4 spanner the hexagon provided to apply a maximum torque of 15 8Nrn OPERATION Having instatted the transducers as instructed they are ready for use Before applying power check that the correct polarity and excitation levels are being applied LOAD CHARACTERISTICS 4 20mA Current Output The tota resistive load in the loop to include all the cable resistance can be from to 50 x supply volts 7 ohms e g witha 24V d c supply the permissible load is from zero up to 850 ohms WARRANTY We guarantee this instrument against faulty workmanship and matcrial for a period of one year from date of delivery The Company undertake to repair frec of charge ex works any instrument found to be defective within the specified period providing the instrument has bcen used within the specification inaccordance with these instructions and has not been misused in any way Detailed notice of such defccts and satisfactory proof thereof must be piven to the Company immediately after the diseovery and the goods
247. re trademarks or trade names of their respective companies 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Multifunction 1 0 Devices for PCI PXI CompactPCI and PCMCIA Bus Computers NATIONAL re December 2000 Edition Part Number 322072 01 Worldwide Technical Support and Product Information ni com National Instruments Corporate Headquarters 11500 North Mopac Expressway Austin Texas 78759 3504 USA Tel 512 794 0100 Worldwide Offices Australia 03 9879 5166 Austria 0662 45 79 90 0 Belgium 02 757 00 20 Brazil 011 284 5011 Canada Calgary 403 274 9391 Canada Ottawa 613 233 5949 Canada Qu bec 514 694 8521 China Shanghai 021 6555 7838 China ShenZhen 0755 3904939 Denmark 45 76 26 00 Finland 09 725 725 11 France 01 48 14 24 24 Germany 089 741 31 30 Greece 30 1 42 96 427 Hong Kong 2645 3186 India 91805275406 Israel 03 6120092 Italy 02 413091 Japan 03 5472 2970 Korea 02 596 7456 Mexico 5 280 7625 Netherlands 0348 433466 New Zealand 09 914 0488 Norway 32 27 73 00 Poland 0 22 528 94 06 Portugal 351 1 726 9011 Singapore 2265886 Spain 91 640 0085 Sweden 08 587 895 00 Switzerland 056 200 51 51 Taiwan 02 2528 7227 United Kingdom 01635 523545 For further support information see the Technical Support Resources appendix To comment on the documentation send e mail to techpubseni com Copyright 1998 2000 National Instruments Corporation rights reserved Important Information Warranty
248. rity 99 997 Excitation voltage 10 05 Voltage Sensitivity 2 023mV V Sampling rate 1 000samples sec Temperature 29 39 x Humidity 3396 2 6 DBBSE 50kN A2242 External Load Cell Calibration Table 0 04 DBBSE SOkN 26 2242 DBBSE 50kN A2242 HE External load S a j Figure 2 25 DBBSE 50kN A2242 external load cell Applied Ltd excitation voltage red excitation voltage blue output voltage green output voltage yellow and ground shield In the following more information and technical specifications concern ing the DBBSE 50kN A 2242 external load cell are given through the Applied technical references and manuals 26 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax CALIBRATION CERTIFICATE Calibration of Transducer Date 21 May 2004 Customer Neotek Xystris amp Co E Venizelou 105 Smyrni 171 22 ut Athens Greece Customer Order Ref 24067 AML Order Ref 51305048 Calibration Results 25591 Transducer Type DBBSE 50kN Serial No A2242 Load Rating 5OkN Proof Rating 75kN Zero Output 0 037mV 10Vdc 2 Full Scale Output 2 041 Non Linearity 0 02 FS Hysteresis 0 01 FS Supply Voltage 10Vdc Insulation Resistance gt 1000 megohms at 100Vdc Electrical Connections Red ve supply Blue ve supply
249. rs optional B 2 to B 6 50 pin E Series connector pin assignments figure B 5 50 pin extended digital input connector pin assignments figure B 6 68 pin E Series connector pin assignments figure B 3 68 pin extended digital input connector pin assignments figure B 4 power connections 4 30 Programmable Peripheral Interface 6025E only 4 22 to 4 23 mode input timing figure 4 27 mode 1 output timing figure 4 28 mode 2 bidirectional timing figure 4 29 Port C pin assignments 4 23 power up state 4 24 to 4 25 signal names used in diagrams table 4 25 to 4 26 timing specifications 4 25 to 4 29 timing connections 4 30 to 4 49 DAQ timing connections 4 32 to 4 40 general purpose timing signal connections 4 43 to 4 49 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual 1 8 programmable function input connections 4 31 to 4 32 waveform generation timing connections 4 40 to 4 43 signal sources 4 8 to 4 9 floating signal sources 4 9 ground referenced signal sources 4 9 single ended connections 4 17 to 4 19 floating signal sources RSE configuration 4 18 grounded signal sources NRSE configuration 4 18 to 4 19 when to use 4 17 SISOURCE signal 4 40 software installation 2 1 software programming choices 1 3 to 1 5 LabVIEW and LabWindows CVI 1 3 to 1 4 Measurement Studio software 1 3 to 1 4 National Instruments application software 1 3 to 1 4 NI DAQ driver software 1 4 to 1 5 VirtualBench 1 4 specifications PCI a
250. rt mern und in Zweifeisfallen fragen Sie bitte bei uns oder Ihrem Lieferanten nach Technische Anderungen sind vorbehalten Die deutsche Anleitung finden ab Seite 3 i Die zugeh rigen Abbildungen finden Sie ab Seite 1 Note This booklet contains general information on your new power supply unit and together with the Technical data sheet it describes the installation and operation In case of discrepancies the data contained in the Technical data leaflet always takes priority and in case of linguistic contradic tions the German version prevails In case of error or doubt please contact us or your supplier Subject to technical changes without prior notice You will find the English instructions Wide es page 5 You will find the illustrations page 1 Information Ce manuel contient des informations g n rales au sujet de votre nouvelle alimentation lectrique et en combinaison avec le suppl ment Donn es Techniques il en d crit l installation et l exploitation En cas de d roga tions les indications fournies dans le suppl ment Donn es Techniques feront foi et la version allemande s appliquera dans le cas de contradictions linguisti ques Veuillez vous adresser nos services ou votre fournisseur en cas d erreurs ou de doutes Sous toutes r serves de modifications technique
251. rten your learning curve save development time and reduce maintenance costs over the application life cycle We schedule instructor led courses in cities worldwide or we can hold a course at your facility We also offer a professional certification program that identifies individuals who have high levels of skill and knowledge on using NI products Visit ni com training Professional Services Our Professional Services Team is comprised of NI applications engineers NI Consulting Services and a worldwide NI Alliance Partner Program of more than 600 independent consultants and NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS Alliance Partner integrators Services range from start up assistance to turnkey system integration Visit ni com alliance OEM Support We offer design in consulting and product integration assistance if you want to use our products for OEM applications For information about special pricing and services for OEM customers visit ni com oem NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS ni com e 800 433 3488 National Instruments Tel 512 683 0100 info ni com Local Sales and Technical Support In offices worldwide our staff is local to the country giving you access to engineers who speak your language NI delivers industry leading technical support through online knowledge bases our applications engineers and access to 14 000 measurement and automation professionals within NI Developer Exchange forums Find immediate answer
252. s Vous trouverez la version francaise a partir dela page 7 Vous trouverez les graphiques correspondants partir dela page 1 _ PU 327 015 00 10D US Patent 0442 9235 Rev 01 2003 Nota Este folleto contiene informaci n general acerca de su nuevo suministro ES de corriente y junto con el suplemento Datos t cnicos describe el pro cee ACO 8 ceso de instalaci n y operaci n En caso de discrepancias tendr n prioridad las informaciones del suplemento Datos t cnicos De existir contra dicciones ling isticas regir la versi n alemana En caso de errores o dudas comuni quese con nosotros o dir jase su proveedor Se reserva el derecho a efectuar modificaciones t cnicas m Las indicaciones en espa ol figuran a partir dela pagina 9 Las figuras correspondientes se encuentran a partir dela p gina 1 ens PULS Nota 1 ll presente manuale contiene informazioni di carattere generale per il Vos tro nuovo alimentatore di corrente e descrive unitamente al prospetto alle gato Dati Tecnici l installazione ed il funzionamento In caso di divergenze si tenga sempre conto che sono i Dati Tecnici contenuti nell alle gato ad aver la precedenza e che in caso di contrasti sar sempre la versione tedesca a far testo In presenza di errori e in caso di dubbio siete invitati a sottoporre direttamente a noi o Vostri fornitori i quesiti d
253. s 609 50 Housing box for Tracker 240 69 00 69 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 _0 09 45 npepes aX THE MapayyeAtac ni PAG Tonos AGHNA 1 603 10 288 56 DAnewun 0 95 pe mv rapayyeXa ___ 100 uerpnrolc 30 my kai THY NapayyeAia rosa Ta ten napay vouv sk gAnans AQPEAN ano mv pag EURO Iconpia o pe APPLIED MEASUREMENTS LTD UK diabeor yia fj G ukpivion pac laxuc 90 Kpatngeie bev kpamon Sev MANY popou by Y poo NEOTEK amp Zia 2
254. s Used in This Manual lt gt bold CompactPCI italic monospace The following conventions are used in this manual Angle brackets containing numbers separated by an ellipsis represent a range of values associated with a bit or signal name for example DBIO lt 3 0 gt The symbol indicates that the text following it applies only to a specific product a specific operating system or a specific software version This icon denotes a note which alerts you to important information This icon denotes a caution which advises you of precautions to take to avoid injury data loss or a system crash Bold text denotes items that you must select or click on in the software such as menu items and dialog box options Bold text also denotes parameter names CompactPCI refers to the core specification defined by the PCI Industrial Computer Manufacturer s Group PICMG Italic text denotes variables emphasis a cross reference or an introduction to a key concept This font also denotes text that is a placeholder for a word or value that you must supply Monospace font denotes text or characters that you should enter from the keyboard sections of code programming examples and syntax examples This font is also used for the proper names of disk drives paths directories National Instruments Corporation 6023 6024 6025 User Manual About This Manual programs subprograms subroutines device names func
255. s a response from the external device indicating that it has received the data from your DIO device OBF Output Output buffer full a low signal on this handshaking line indicates that data has been written to the port INTR Output Interrupt request this signal becomes high when the 82C55A requests service during a data transfer You must set the appropriate interrupt enable bits to generate this signal RD Internal Read this signal is the read signal generated from the control lines of the computer I O expansion bus WR Internal Write this signal is the write signal generated from the control lines of the computer I O expansion bus DATA Bidirectional Data lines at the specified port for output mode this signal indicates the availability of data on the data line For input mode this signal indicates when the data on the data lines should be valid 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual 4 26 ni com Chapter 4 Signal Connections Mode 1 Input Timing Timing specifications for an input transfer in mode are shown in Figure 4 13 Ti lt gt 2 T4 i gt STB IBF NE INTR RD i 1 i T3 oOo o gt gt DATA gt Description Minimum Maximum Tl STB Pulse Width 100 2 STB 0 to IBF 1 150 13 Data before 1 20 T4 STB 1 to INTR 1 150 5 Da
256. s to your questions at ni com support We also offer service programs that provide automatic upgrades to your application development environment and higher levels of technical support Visit ni com ssp Hardware Services NI Factory Installation Services NI Factory Installation Services FIS is the fastest and easiest way to use your PXI or PXI SCXI combination systems right out of the box Trained NI technicians install the software and hardware and configure the system to your specifications NI extends the standard warranty by one year on hardware components controllers chassis modules purchased with FIS To use FIS simply configure your system online with ni com pxiadvisor Calibration Services NI recognizes the need to maintain properly calibrated devices for high accuracy measurements We provide manual calibration procedures services to recalibrate your products and automated calibration software specifically designed for use by metrology laboratories Visit ni com calibration Repair and Extended Warranty NI provides complete repair services for our products Express repair and advance replacement services are also available We offer extended warranties to help you meet project life cycle requirements Visit ni com services 2004 National Instruments Corporation rights reserved National Instruments Alliance Partner ni com and SCXI are trademarks of National Instruments Other product and company names listed a
257. se with your device including cables connector blocks and other accessories as follows e Cables and cable assemblies shielded and ribbon e Connector blocks shielded and unshielded screw terminals RTSI bus cables e SCXI modules and accessories for isolating amplifying exciting and multiplexing signals for relays and analog output With SCXI you can condition and acquire up to 3 072 channels e Low channel count signal conditioning modules devices and accessories including conditioning for strain gauges and RTDs simultaneous sample and hold and relays National Instruments Corporation 1 5 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction For more information about these products refer to the National Instruments catalogue or web site or call the office nearest you 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual 1 6 ni com Installation and Configuration This chapter explains how to install and configure your 6023E 6024E or 6025E device Software Installation Install your software before installing your device If you are using LabVIEW LabWindows CVI ComponentWorks or VirtualBench install this software before installing the NI DAQ driver software Refer to the software release notes of your software for installation instructions If you are using NI DAQ refer to your NI DAQ release notes Find the installation section for your operating system and follow the instructions given there Unpacking You
258. specifications and calibration con stants of the cell pressure transducer while Figure 2 12 and 2 13 show the calibration charts Finally the fourth pressure line installed at the base pedestal is con nected to the top cap of the specimen A RS Type 249 T023096 pressure transducer is installed and measures the pore water pressure The wiring connection of the transducer consists of a shielded four cable wire which ends to a 5 pin socket plug 240 The wiring connection of the pressure transducer follows the below mentioned cabling excitation voltage blue excitation voltage green output voltage red output voltage yel low and ground shield Table 2 4 summarises the main specifications and calibration constants of the cell pressure transducer while Figure 2 15 and 2 16 show the calibration charts 15 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax Figure 2 11 Cell pressure line Port3 Calibration of Pressure Transducer 2200AGB1001A2UA003 Port 03 GeoLab GIO 05 July 2004 PCI 6024E ure kPa Press y 9 868x 5 809 at sucio 1 000 200 _ 40 0 _ 600 _ 80 0 Voltage mV Figure 2 12 2200AGB1001A2UA003 Cell Pressure Port3 Calibration 2004 07 05 16 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax Pressure kPa 20 0 gt Calibration of Pressure Transducer 2200AGB1001A2UA003 Port 03 GeoLab GIO amp NITHE 23 November 2004 PCI 6024E 1 200 1 0
259. ssignments figure B 5 50 pin extended digital input connector pin assignments figure B 6 68 pin E Series connector pin assignments figure B 3 68 pin extended digital input connector pin assignments figure B 4 pin assignments table 6023E 6024E 4 2 6025E 4 3 National Instruments Corporation 1 5 Index L LabVIEW and LabWindows CVI application software 1 3 to 1 4 manual See documentation Measurement Studio software 1 3 to 1 4 mode input timing figure 4 27 mode 1 output timing figure 4 28 mode 2 bidirectional timing figure 4 29 multichannel scanning considerations 3 5 to 3 6 NI Developer Zone D 1 NI DAQ driver software 1 4 to 1 5 noise environmental 4 49 NRSE nonreferenced single ended mode configuration 4 9 to 4 10 description table 3 3 differential connections 4 15 to 4 16 recommended configuration figure 4 12 single ended connections for ground referenced signal sources 4 18 to 4 19 0 OBF signal description table 4 26 mode 1 output timing figure 4 28 mode 2 bidirectional timing figure 4 29 operating environment specifications PCI and PXI buses A 10 PCMCIA bus A 18 optional equipment 1 5 to 1 6 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Index P lt 0 7 gt signal description table 4 4 digital I O specifications A 7 signal summary table 4 7 lt 0 7 gt signal description table 4 4 digital I O specifications A 7 signal summary table
260. t gives recommended connectors that mate to the I O connector on your device PCI 6023E and PCI 6024E Honda 68 position solder cup female connector Honda backshell DAQCard 6024E Honda 68 Position VHDCI National Instruments Corporation B 1 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Custom Cabling and Optional Connectors 6025E AMP 100 position IDC male connector AMP backshell 0 50 max O D cable AMP backshell 0 55 max O D cable Mating connectors and a backshell kit for making custom 68 pin cables are available from National Instruments Optional Connectors The following table shows the optional connector and cable assembly combinations you can use for each device Device Connector Cable Assembly PCI 6023E 6024E 68 Pin E Series SH6868 R6868 50 Pin E Series SH6850 R6850 DAQCard 6024E 68 Pin E Series SHC68 68 EP RC68 68 50 Pin E Series 68 50 adapter plus SHC68 68 EP or RC68 68 cable 6025E MIO 16 68 Pin 68 Pin Extended SH1006868 Digital Input 50 Pin E Series 50 Pin Extended RI005050 Digital Input 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual B 2 ni com National Instruments Corporation Appendix B Custom Cabling and Optional Connectors Figure B 1 shows the pin assignments for the 68 Pin E Series connector ACH8 ACH1 AIGND ACH10 ACH3 AIGND ACH4 AIGND ACH13 ACH6 AIGND ACH15 DACOOUT DAC1OUT RESERVED 0104 DGND DIO1 DI
261. t sources You can also acquire or generate digital signals for communication and control CompactPCI Using PXI compatible products with standard CompactPCI products is an important feature provided by PXI Specification Revision 1 0 If you use a PXI compatible plug in card in a standard CompactPCI chassis you cannot use PXI specific functions but you can still use the basic plug in card functions For example the RTSI bus on your PXI E Series device is available in a PXI chassis but not in a CompactPCI chassis The CompactPCI specification permits vendors to develop sub buses that coexist with the basic PCI interface on the CompactPCI bus Compatible operation is not guaranteed between CompactPCI devices with different sub buses nor between CompactPCI devices with sub buses and PXI The standard implementation for CompactPCI does not include these sub buses Your PXI E Series device works in any standard CompactPCI chassis adhering to PICMG CompactPCI 2 0 R2 1 core specification PXI specific features are implemented on the J2 connector of the CompactPCI bus Table 3 3 Pins Used by PXI E Series Device lists the J2 pins used by your PXI E Series device Your PXI device is compatible with any Compact PCI chassis with a sub bus that does not drive these lines Even if the sub bus is capable of driving these lines the PXI device is still compatible as long as those pins on the sub bus are disabled by default and not ever enabled Damage
262. ta after STB 1 50 T6 RD 0 to INTR 0 200 T7 RD 1 to IBF 0 150 All timing values are in nanoseconds Figure 4 13 Timing Specifications for Mode 1 Input Transfer National Instruments Corporation 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Chapter 4 Signal Connections Mode 1 Output Timing Timing specifications for an output transfer in mode 1 are shown in Figure 4 14 NM WR 0 NE SEN 1 1 A o lt INTR DATA 2 Bs Name Description Minimum Maximum TI WR 0 to INTR 0 250 2 WR 1 to Output 200 T3 WR 1 to OBF 0 150 T4 0 to OBF 1 150 5 Pulse Width 100 T6 1 to INTR 1 150 AII timing values are in nanoseconds Figure 4 14 Timing Specifications for Mode 1 Output Transfer 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual 4 28 ni com Chapter 4 Signal Connections Mode 2 Bidirectional Timing Timing specifications for a bidirectional transfer in mode 2 are shown in Figure 4 15 gt WR i i T6 i 1 lt lt gt INTR i i T3 f STB I n 110 RD E i T2 5 UTE d lj 14 514 4 0 DATA
263. tatic electricity that might be on your clothes or body 5 Insertthe device into a 5 V PXI slot Use the injector ejector handle to fully insert the device into the chassis 6 Screw the front panel of the device to the front panel mounting rail of the system 7 Visually verify the installation Plug in and turn on your computer The device is installed You are now ready to configure your hardware and software Hardware Configuration National Instruments standard architecture for data acquisition and standard bus specifications makes these devices completely software configurable You must perform two types of configuration on the devices bus related and data acquisition related configuration The PCI devices are fully compatible with the industry standard PCI Local Bus Specification Revision 2 2 The PXI device is fully compatible with the PXI Specification Revision 2 0 These specifications let your computer automatically set the device base memory address and interrupt channel without your interaction You can modify data acquisition related configuration settings such as analog input range and mode through application level software Refer to Chapter 3 Hardware Overview for more information about the various settings available for your device These settings are changed and configured through software after you install your device Refer to your software documentation for configuration instructions National I
264. tents INTRODUCTION Por 3 INSPECTION 3 SPECIFICATION ex 3 WF17029 DEAIRING BL CK 4 CONNECTION OF WF17029 AND PRESSURE TRANSDUCER eene nennen 4 DE AIRING THE WF17029 AND TRANSDUCER wesssssssssssssssessssssessssssessessssssssvsasssvsesesnsssssssessessssnsssesusensenvsssssesssvsessenee 4 4 5 Sa NU CC CC a IC KG TEC 5 WYKEHAM FARRANCE N WF17021 WF17022 WF17060 Pressure Transducers lt INTRODUCTION This Appendix describes the use of the following Wykeham Farrance products kPa psi WF17060 0 1000 0 145 WF17021 9 1700 0 250 WF17022 0 3300 0 480 It is written as an Appendix to the Wykeham Farrance CLISP software manual However it is a self contained document and is also used as a separate instruction and operating manual for these products This range of transducers have been specially designed or selected for use in soil mechanics laboratories for the measure ment of cell pressure or pore pressure in triaxial or consolidation tests The WF17060 is the workhorse of the conventional soil mechanics laboratory The advanced design and construction of this transducer ensures exceptional linearity and temperature stability A silicon strain gauge bridge is diffused into a single crystal silicon diaphragm using micro circuit alloying and bonding techniques e
265. ter 4 Signal Connections ty 50 150 ns Figure 4 28 CONVERT Output Signal Timing The sample interval counter on the device normally generates the CONVERT signal unless you select some external source The counter is started by the STARTSCAN signal and continues to count down and reload itself until the scan is finished It then reloads itself in preparation for the next STARTSCAN pulse A D conversions generated by either an internal or external CONVERT signal are inhibited unless they occur within a DAQ sequence Scans occurring within a DAQ sequence can be gated by either the hardware AIGATE signal or software command register gate AIGATE Signal Any PFI pin can externally input the AIGATE signal which is not available as an output on the I O connector The AIGATE signal can mask off scans in a DAQ sequence You can configure the PFI pin you select as the source for the AIGATE signal in either the level detection or edge detection mode You can configure the polarity selection for the PFI pin for either active high or active low In the level detection mode if AIGATE is active the STARTSCAN signal is masked off and no scans can occur In the edge detection mode the first active edge disables the STARTSCAN signal and the second active edge enables STARTSCAN The AIGATE signal can neither stop a scan in progress nor continue a previously gated off scan in other words once a scan has started AIG
266. the DAQCard 6024E Calibration DACs Le 8 J Analog Mux Mode 12 Bit Selection Sampling ADC Switches AD P FIFO 8 gt Muxes Converter Calibration Dither as 4 Mux Circuitry p E 5 Confi uration 3 Memory Al Control IRQ gt MM Vv i 1 Analog Input 1 Interrupt Analog i K PFI Trigger Tigger iTiming Control Request ENS al ontrol i Counter Bus KZ Timing Timing DAQ STC interface t DAQ PCMCIA m Analog Output RTS Bus 7 Digital 1 0 i7 1 DAQ STC Analog 1 Digital 1 0 8 i Timing Control Interface P BUS Output DACO r3 AO Control LN Calibration DACs PCMCIA Connector Analog Input Figure 3 2 DAQCard 6024E Block Diagram The analog input section of each device is software configurable The following sections describe in detail each of the analog input settings Input Mode The devices have three different input modes nonreferenced single ended NRSE referenced single ended RSE and differential DIFF input The single ended input configurations provide up to 16 channels The DIFF input configuration provides u
267. the general purpose counters The up down control signals are input only and do not affect the operation of the DIO lines 6025E only The 6025E device uses an 82C55A programmable peripheral interface to provide an additional 24 lines of digital I O that represent three 8 bit ports PA PB PC You can program each port as an input or output port The 82C55A has three modes of operation simple I O mode 0 strobed mode 1 and bidirectional I O mode 2 In modes 1 and 2 the three ports are divided into two groups group A and group B Each group has eight data bits plus control and status bits from Port PC Modes 1 and 2 use handshaking signals from the computer to synchronize data transfers Refer to Chapter 4 Signal Connections for more detailed information Timing Signal Routing The DAQ STC chip provides a flexible interface for connecting timing signals to other devices or external circuitry Your device uses the RTSI bus to interconnect timing signals between devices PCI and PXI buses only and the programmable function input PFI pins on the I O connector to connect the device to external circuitry These connections are designed to enable the device to both control and be controlled by other devices and circuits There are a total of 13 timing signals internal to the DAQ STC that you can control by an external source You can also control these timing signals by signals generated internally to the DAQ STC a
268. the two inputs of an instrumentation amplifier a very accurate differential amplifier with a high input impedance computer signal indicating that the CPU should suspend its current task to service a designated activity input output the transfer of data to from a computer system involving communications channels operator interface devices and or data acquisition and control interfaces current output high G 6 ni com kS L LabVIEW LED library linearity LSB MIO MSB Glossary current output low interrupt request kilo the standard metric prefix for 1 000 or 103 used with units of measure such as volts hertz and meters kilo the prefix for 1 024 or 210 used with in quantifying data or computer memory 1 000 samples laboratory virtual instrument engineering workbench light emitting diode a file containing compiled object modules each comprised of one of more functions that can be linked to other object modules that make use of these functions NIDAQMSC LIB is a library that contains NI DAQ functions The NI DAQ function set is broken down into object modules so that only the object modules that are relevant to your application are linked in while those object modules that are not relevant are not linked the adherence of device response to the equation R KS where R response S stimulus and K a constant least significant bit multifunction I O most significant bit
269. their answers relating to usage and special features of your device General Information What is the DAQ STC The DAQ STC is the system timing control application specific integrated circuit ASIC designed by National Instruments and is the backbone of the E Series devices The DAQ STC contains seven 24 bit counters and three 16 bit counters The counters are divided into the following three groups e Analog input two 24 bit two 16 bit counters e Analog output three 24 bit one 16 bit counters e General purpose counter timer functions two 24 bit counters You can configure the groups independently with timing resolutions of 50 ns or 10 With the DAQ STC you can interconnect a wide variety of internal timing signals to other internal blocks The interconnection scheme is quite flexible and completely software configurable New capabilities such as buffered pulse generation equivalent time sampling and seamless changing of the sampling rate are possible What does sampling rate mean to me It means that this is the fastest you can acquire data on your device and still achieve accurate results For example these devices have a sampling rate of 200 kS s This sampling rate is aggregate one channel at 200 kS s or two channels at 100 kS s per channel illustrates the relationship What type of 5 V protection do the devices have The PCI and PXI devices have 5 V lines equipped with a self resetting 1 A fuse The PCMCIA
270. tificate Information Serial Number C831B3 Certificate Number 266156 N 187570B 02 Date Printed 26 APR 2001 Buon NI Part Number 184632A 01 Calibration Date 26 2001 Calibration Interval 12 Months Calibration 26 2002 Ambient Temperature 24 Relative Humidity 43 National Instruments certifies that at the time of manufacture the above product was calibrated in accordance with applicable National Instruments procedures These procedures are in compliance with relevant clauses of ISO 9002 and are designed to assure that the product listed above meets or exceeds National Instruments specifications National Instruments further certifies that the measurements standards and instruments used during the calibration of this product are traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology or are derived from accepted values of natural physical constants The environment in which this product was calibrated is maintained within the operating specifications of the instrument and the standards For questions or comments please contact National Instruments Technical Support 4 NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS Signed TYPE R6868 MANUFACTURING P N 182482A 01 gt FIBI LA EE AP ADU Domingo Salcido CATALOG NUMBER 18248201 Operations Manager 09 08 00 321722 01 National Instruments has been registered as compliant with the ISO 9002 1994 standard ULL
271. tions operations variables filenames and extensions and code excerpts NI DAQ NI DAQ refers to the NI DAQ driver software for PC compatible computers unless otherwise noted PXI PXI stands for PCI eXtensions for Instrumentation PXI is an open specification that builds off the CompactPCI specification by adding instrumentation specific features Related Documentation The following documents contain information you may find helpful e DAQ STC Technical Reference Manual e National Instruments Application Note 025 Field Wiring and Noise Considerations for Analog Signals e PCT Local Bus Specification Revision 2 2 e PICMG CompactPCI 2 0 R2 1 e PXI Specification Revision 2 0 e Card PCMCIA 7 1 Standard 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Xii ni com Introduction This chapter describes the 6023E 6024E and 6025E devices lists what you need to get started gives unpacking instructions and describes the optional software and equipment Features of the 6023E 6024E and 6025E The 6025E features 16 channels eight differential of analog input two channels of analog output a 100 pin connector and 32 lines of digital The 6024E features 16 channels of analog input two channels of analog output a 68 pin connector and eight lines of digital I O The 6023E is identical to the 6024E except that it does not have analog output channels These devices use the National Instruments DAQ STC system timing controll
272. tor 558140 0032 ISSUE 1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION Pressure Connections external to BS 2779 compatible with ISO 228 recommended seal Part Number 232646 0002 or Dowty Part Number 400 021 4490 41 Mounting Omni directional self supported directly into the pipework Use a 19mm AF 3 4 spanner on the hexagon provided to apply a maximum torque of 15 8 Nm OPERATION Having installed the transducers as instructed they are ready for use Before applying power check that the correct polarity and excitation levels are being applied See Table 1 for electrical connections Mating connector miniature DIN type Part Number 557230 GROUNDING All versions should be grounded by the installation pipework If this is not possible then the high output transducers and transmitters should be grounded by an earth wire connected to the appropriate pin Four core screened cable should be used with the millivolt version with the screen earthed at the instrumentation end CALIBRATION Transducers are calibrated to the datum requested at time of order this can be identified by the sixth letter of the identification code as follows Absolute datum Gauge datum vented to atmosphere the electrical connector CHARACTERISTICS The total permissible resistive load in the loop to include all the cable resistance can be from zero to 50 x supply volts 12 ohms e g with a 24 V d c supply the permissible load is from zero up to
273. true even if another PFI is externally inputting the source clock This output is set to high impedance at startup National Instruments Corporation 4 43 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Chapter 4 Signal Connections Figure 4 35 shows the timing requirements for the GPCTRO_SOURCE signal tp 50 ns minimum tw 23 ns minimum Figure 4 35 GPCTRO_SOURCE Signal Timing The maximum allowed frequency is 20 MHz with a minimum pulse width of 23 ns high or low There is no minimum frequency limitation The 20 MHz or 100 kHz timebase normally generates the GPCTRO_SOURCE signal unless you select some external source GPCTRO_GATE Signal Any PFI pin can externally input the GPCTRO_GATE signal which is available as an output on the PFI9 GPCTRO_GATE pin As an input the GPCTRO_GATE signal is configured in the edge detection mode You can select any PFI pin as the source for GPCTRO_GATE and configure the polarity selection for either rising or falling edge You can use the gate signal in a variety of different applications to perform actions such as starting and stopping the counter generating interrupts saving the counter contents and so on As an output the GPCTRO_GATE signal reflects the actual gate signal connected to general purpose counter 0 This is true even if the gate is externally generated by another PFI This output is set to high impedance at startup Figure 4 36 shows the timing requirements for the GPCTR
274. ts the AC DC transformer and the connector board are mounted on a chassis plate firmly gripped by four bolts and nuts at its corners Not to mention that the front door can be easily removed from its hinges according to Figure 4 5 4 2 The analog digital input outup card An analog digital input output National Instruments PCI 6024E card is installed in a personal computer The card is installed in a PCI port on the motherboard and connected to the connector board in the terminal box The main function of the card is to convert the analog output of the transducers to digital signal so it can be further processed by the personal computer One of the most important features specifications of such a card is the number of analog input channels and its scanning rate capability The PCI 6024E card has 16 analog input channels In case the input analog signal is single ended then the response of 16 transducers can be read Should the signal be differential the number of analog channels is reduced to 8 Further specifications of the analog digital input output NI PCI 6024E card can be found in the attached card s manual 46 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax o Sy NATIONAL Pp INSTRUMENTS Figure 4 8 CB 68LP connector board Figure 4 9 Analog digital input output data acquisition card NI PCI 60245 47 The Handbook of WF GeoTriax Wy NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS Certificate of Calibration Board Information Cer
275. ts and physical parameters National Instruments Tel 800 433 3488 info ni com ni com 10 Multifunction Cable Accessory Selection Guides NI Cable Design Advantages The SH68 68 EP cable is the most commonly used E Series and S Series cable The cable is designed to work specifically with the NI Multifunction DAQ devices to preserve signal integrity through these technologies oly id ond Tesi paar rar cri degead LO Vcr o a d fe Ia ded euis ded ce ADR Figure 1 SH68 68 EP Cable variety of cabling and accessory options are available for your needs Use the following tables to choose the most appropriate cables and accessories Figure 2 NI offers a wide variety of cable and accessory options such as the SH68 68 EP cable and the BNC 2110 terminal block Platform Shielding Connect to Cable Adapter Accessory PCI PXI USB FireWire Shielded SCC portable signal SH68 68 EP SC 2345 and modules page 251 conditioning per channel Shielded SCXI high performance SCXI 1349 SCXI Chassis and Modules page 270 signal conditioning Shielded Screw terminals 1 SH68 68 EP or SH68 68R1 EP SCB 68 Shielded BNC terminal block SH68 68 EP BNC 2110 BNC 2120 BNC 2090 Shielded 50 pin connector SH6850 CB50 custom or 3rd party Shielded Configurable connectivity box SH68 68 EP 1000 3
276. udes valves and ports for back pressure and pore water pressure measurement Two drainage ports are provided in the cell base for back pressures and porewater pressure measurements using transducers or null indicators The no volume change valves which are supplied as standard with the cells are of the pivot on off type having an external male thread of 3 8 BSP with a conical female entry into the valve bore Valve A inlet outlet valve is counterbored to accept our quick release connection but it will also accept the standard connections CONSTRUCTION The various valves are indicated as follows A Inlet outlet for chamber pressure Cell Pressure B amp C Bottom drainage for back pressure pore water pressure D Outlet for top drainage LOADING RAM The loading ram or piston is precision engineered and is fitted into the cell with ea Great care must be taken to avoid damage to this ram Do not at any time use abrasive cloths or powders to clean the bore or the ram See Recommended Hints CHAMBER To provide maximum visibility the cell chambers are made from clear lucite type material which is stress relieved by Wykeham Farrance during manufacture This material can be adversely affected by certain environmental conditions and note must be made of the recommendations given later concerning storage and care The chambers are designed medium without water is higf Cells for samples up to 100mm 4 0 inches
277. utput ground signal Application Specific Integrated Circuit a proprietary semiconductor component designed and manufactured to perform a set of specific functions for a specific customer a memory address that serves as the starting address for programmable registers All other addresses are located by adding to the base address a voltage range spanning both negative and positive voltages the voltage high enough to cause breakdown of optical isolation semiconductors or dielectric materials Also see working voltage G 2 ni com bus bus master CH channel CMRR CONVERT counter timer crosstalk CTR current drive capability D D A DAC DACOOUT DACIOUT National Instruments Corporation G 3 Glossary the group of conductors that interconnect individual circuitry in a computer Typically a bus is the expansion interface to which I O or other devices are connected Examples of PC buses are the ISA bus and PCI bus a type of a plug in board or controller with the ability to read and write devices on the computer bus Celsius channel pin or wire lead to which you apply or from which you read an analog or digital signal Analog signals can be single ended or differential For digital signals channels are grouped to form ports common mode rejection ratio a measure of the ability of a differential amplifier to reject interference from a common mode signal usually expressed in decibels dB
278. uts esee 3 8 Device RTSI Clocks eerte ete e He er Rr ree ra Tnt 3 9 a e Ree n t 3 9 National Instruments Corporation V 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Contents Chapter 4 Signal Connections Comme Ctr ss ee ite e obe bep te He Analog Input Signal Types of Signal Sources iie dede Floating Signal Ground Referenced Signal Sources esse Analog Input Modes 212 t tee E ey te d ees Analog Input Signal Differential Connection Considerations DIFF Input Configuration Differential Connections for Ground Referenced Signal Sources Differential Connections for Nonreferenced or Floating Signal DOULCES Ss D Single Ended Connection Considerations Single Ended Connections for Floating Signal Sources RSE ede eer regno Single Ended Connections for Grounded Signal Sources Configuration Common Mode Signal Rejection Considerations eese Analog Output Signal Digital I O Signal Connections AU
279. uts of the DACs In order to use you must set the DACs to posted update mode National Instruments Corporation 4 41 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Chapter 4 Signal Connections As an output the UPDATE signal reflects the actual update pulse that is connected to the DACs This is true even if the updates are externally generated by another PFI The output is an active low pulse with a pulse width of 300 to 350 ns This output is set to high impedance at startup Figures 4 32 and 4 33 show the input and output timing requirements for the UPDATE signal Rising Edge Polarity Falling Edge Polarity ty 10 ns minimum 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Figure 4 32 UPDATE Input Signal Timing tw 300 350 ns Figure 4 33 UPDATE Output Signal Timing The DACs are updated within 100 ns of the leading edge Separate the UPDATE pulses with enough time that new data can be written to the DAC latches The device UI counter normally generates the UPDATE signal unless you select some external source The UI counter is started by the WFTRIG signal and can be stopped by software or the internal Buffer Counter D A conversions generated by either an internal or external UPDATE signal do not occur when gated by the software command register gate UISOURCE Signal Any PFI pin can externally input the UISOURCE signal which is not available as an output on the I O connect
280. ve been inspected tested and calibrated using NAMAS traceable test equipment in all respects with the requirements of the customer s order Wykeham Forronce International Limited Registered in England No 360538 VAT Reg No GB 207 9025 75 Strain Gauge Based Submersible Triaxial LOAD CELL Capacities IkN to 50kN Fully submersible to external pressure of up to 70bar Pressure Compensated Design Robust Construction Simple Installation High Performance High Sideload Tolerance 3 YEAR WARRANTY Options Available Other Ranges Available on request Equivalents to other manufacturers available Different Cable Lengths DESCRIPTION The STALC series of submersible triaxial load cells has been designed for measuring compressive loads from to 5OkN The products can be fitted into new or existing triaxial cells with diameter up to 100mm The design features an internal pressure compensation system that eliminates zero offset changes when the load cell is subjected to external pressure changes Being insensitive to cell confining pressure the load cell can be used inside the triaxial cell the load also being measured within the cell eliminates the effects of piston friction The use of specially selected heat treated stainless steel and precision strain gauges ensure optimum performance and excellent long term stability Transducer Specialists APPLIED MEASUREMENTS LI
281. vi LIST OF FIGURES List of Tables 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 3 1 WF 10056 SN 100175 7 triaxial loading frame specifications 1 WF commands via RS232 serial port 2 RS Type 249 S086219 Cell Pressure Port1 Calibration Table 11 2200AGB1001A2UA003 Pore Pressure Port2 Calibration Table 13 2200AGB1001A2UA003 Cell Pressure Port3 Calibration Table 15 RS 249 023096 Pressure Port4 Calibration Table 15 LSC HS50 9021 Specifications Calibration Table 21 DBBSE 50kN A2242 External Load Cell Calibration Table 26 STALC3 50kN 24937 Submersible Load Cell Calibration Table 29 LSC HS25 9016 Calibration Table 36 vil viii LIST OF TABLES Preface The main purpose of this report is to present the Wyhekam Farrance tri axial apparatus found in the Laboratory of Geomaterials Section of Me chanics Faculty of Applied Mathematics and Physics National Technical University of Athens Its main parts the loading frame and the cell will be presented in details in the following sections Keeping this preface as short as possible I would like to express my deep thanks to Mr Michalis Chatzikabouris and Mr Paris Xystris whose technical support was more than precious during and after the successful installation of the described apparatus I should also attribute my appreci ation to Mr Patrolekas Michalis as far as the data acquisition software is concerned Finally but
282. ving the air it is advisable to leave the or for at least eight hours with aii penre iy kPa This will allow any trapped air to be absorbed into the solution After this period the apparatus should be water thus displacing aerated water This and den berb It may be necessary to repeat this procedure once more if any signs of air cur during the c first two mm of operation Wykeham Farrance 3 Automatic Volume Change CONTROL MODULE VALVE POSITIONS The reversing control module WF 17042 which forms the base of the WF 17044 has the following controls and operating positions There are two valves The one on the left hand side of the box which has two positions Volume change and Bypass The other valve is situated on the righthand side of the box and has three positions Flow down Bypass Flow up Th order to bypass the automatic volume change apparatus both valves must be in the Bypass position which will then allow the Strectly trough the triaxial cell without going through the volume change apparatus To measure the actual volume change the lefthand side valve must be set to the Volume Change position and the righthand side to either the Flow Up or Flow Down positions If during a test the apparatus is ilk eani volume change 180 the range of the apparatus can be increased by changing the flow direction using the right
283. x side force Input resistance Output resistance Compensated temperature range Thermal Zero Shift Thermal Sensitivity Shift Environmental pressure range 5 10 30 kN 200 amv V 10vDC 15 VDC max 0 5 FS max 0 5 FS max 0 05mm 50 FS 385 ohms 350 ohms 0 degree to 5 degree 0 02 FS degree C max 0 01 FS degree C max 70 Bar max 3 The WF volume change apparatus WF17044 SN 107584 7 3 1 Introduction Due to lack of space inside the WF11001 triaxial cell the volume change of the specimen is measured by a WF automatic volume change apparatus The WF17044 automatic volume change apparatus allows for two different methods of measuring diaphragm displacement l he WF17044 is the most popular version The apparatus has a piston area of 40 97cm and a distance stroke of 25mm The capacity of the standard unit is 100ml while the overall dimensions of the apparatus are 220 x 170 x 350mm weighting up to 8kgr The apparatus consists of two chambers which may sustain up to 1700kPa internal pore water pressure The apparatus has two on off valves A Bypass and Volume Change valve and a Flow up and Flow down valve The first valve allows water bypass the apparatus when in saturation or measure the volume of the water expelled or sucked by the specimen during the consolidation or drained compression extension while the second one selects whether water comi
284. xc 6 amp 8 Linked Yellow ve Signal 12 Green ve Signal 13 Applied Measurements Limited hereby certifies that the above items have been inspected tested and calibrated using NAMAS traceable test equipment in all respects with the requirements of the customer s order Director PETER LEWIS Reg No 2583968 een i NEOTEK GREFCE Fex NO 10199359778 14 Nov 2093 16 04 1 4 LI amp Metroaren U Measuring amp Testing Systems Vs m 180 8001 2000 B Ym ow THA 210 7721231 _ ETAMIPH 4 818 3053 2107721302 120062005 OEMA AYNAMOKYWEAH KAI TOMEAX YAIKON NOAYTEXNEIOY 5 TIV va e157 moreucuye OTL KGAUNTOUY IEG flor _ E 2 MONAAA Load S000kg 712 1 qM TA o 712 13 Load Button for load cell 161 74 161 74 Mounting adaptor for triaxial 96 56 96 i 243 Tracker 240 Series Indicator 5 digit T cer supply 639 71 Analogue output Status inputs RS422 485 communications 639 71 CaycwacoordOuue ord e
285. xial cell WF 11138 Conversion set for testing 2 8 in samples in WF 11001 100 mm triaxial cell WF 11139 Conversion set for testing 70 mm samples in WF 11001 100 mm triaxial cell WF 11140 Conversion set for testing 100 mm samples in WF 11144 150 mm triaxial cell Important note The Advanced Triaxial Cells with wire outlets for transducers are shown on page 42 28 WF 10201 WF 10751 WF 11001 Advanced Soil Mechanics Testing Systems W Wykeham Farrance Geotechnical Triaxial Triaxial cells Triaxial cells accessories Part No Cell type Sample size Pedestal Top cap Base disc Pair of Membrane ring 2 porous disc WF 10201 14 in WF 10230 WF 10310 WF 10370 WF 10550 WF 10490 WF 10520 35 mm WF 10231 WF 10311 WF 10371 WF 10551 WF 10490 WF 10520 38 mm WF 10240 WF 10320 WF 10380 WF 10560 WF 10500 WF 10530 50 mm WF 10251 WF 10331 WF 10391 WF 10571 WF 10510 WF 10540 WF 10751 2 8 in WF 10776 WF 10761 WF 10771 WF 10841 WF 10821 WF 10831 70 mm WF 10777 WF 10762 WF 10772 WF 10842 WF 10821 WF 10831 WF 11001 100 mm WF 11033 WF 11011 WF 11021 WF 11111 WF 11091 WF 11100 105 mm WF 11034 WF 11012 WF 11022 WF 11112 WF 11091 WF 11100 WF 11144 150 mm WF 11166 WF 11151 WF 11161 WF 11231 WF 11221 WF 11240 1 Including drainage leads 2 Pack of 10 Sample accessories Part No Cell type Sample size Suction ring Three part Two part Filter drains Hand device placing to
286. ximum ratings of input or output signals on the devices can damage the device and the computer Maximum input ratings for each signal are given in the Protection column of Table 4 3 National Instruments is not liable for any damages resulting from such signal connections AN 1 0 Connector Figure 4 1 shows the pin assignments for the 68 pin I O connector on the PCI 6023E PCI 6024E and DAQCard 6024E Figure 4 2 shows the pin assignments for the 100 pin I O connector on the PCI 6025E Refer to Appendix B Custom Cabling and Optional Connectors for pin National Instruments Corporation 4 1 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Chapter 4 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Signal Connections assignments of the optional 50 and 68 pin connectors A signal description follows the figures ACH8 1 AIGND ACH10 ACH3 AIGND ACH4 AIGND ACH13 ACH6 AIGND ACH15 DACOOUT DAC1OUT RESERVED 0104 DGND DIO1 DIO6 DGND 5 DGND DGND PFIO TRIG1 PFH TRIG2 DGND 5 DGND PFI5 UPDATE PFI6 WFTRIG DGND PFI9 GPCTRO_GATE GPCTRO_OUT FREQ_OUT 1 Not available on the 6023E 99 68 67 66 65 o 64 63 62 61 60 oa 59 gt 58 57 56 55 o 54 k 53 52 e
287. y of Analog Input Connections 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual 4 12 ni com Chapter 4 Signal Connections Differential Connection Considerations DIFF Input Configuration A DIFF connection is one in which the analog input signal has its own reference signal or signal return path These connections are available when the selected channel is configured in DIFF input mode The input signal is connected to the positive input of the PGIA and its reference signal or return is connected to the negative input of the PGIA When you configure a channel for DIFF input each signal uses two multiplexer inputs one for the signal and one for its reference signal Therefore with a DIFF configuration for every channel up to eight analog input channels are available Use DIFF input connections for any channel that meets any of the following conditions e The input signal is low level less than 1 V e The leads connecting the signal to the device are greater than 3 m 10 ft e The input signal requires a separate ground reference point or return signal e The signal leads travel through noisy environments DIFF signal connections reduce picked up noise and increase common mode noise rejection DIFF signal connections also allow input signals to float within the common mode limits of the PGIA National Instruments Corporation 4 13 6023E 6024E 6025E User Manual Chapter 4 Signal Connections Differential Connections for Ground Reference

The Handbook of Wykeham Farrance GeoTriax

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents